-#LyX 1.6.0svn created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 334
+#LyX 1.6.0beta2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 335
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
\family default
Here you can choose an image file and adjust its appearance in the output.
The available units for the image size are explained in appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Get
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
from
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
File
The option
\family sans
Clip
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
bounding
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box
\family sans
Extra
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
options
In this tab you can modify the appearance of the image within LyX and set
the image to be a subfigure of a figure float with an own caption.
Subfigures are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The option
\family sans
Draft
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mode
The
\family sans
Don't
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
unzip
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
on
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
export
\family default
option only affects zipped EPS-graphics, e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zipped EPS-graphics are useful to save disk space when you choose PostScript
as output format, see appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Image formats are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
For general explanations about floats, have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
(# is the actual number).
You can insert the image above the caption, like in Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
or below the caption, like in Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
More about the caption placement is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Cross
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
reference
\end_inset
Referencing is explained in detail in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Normally only one image is inserted to a figure float, but sometimes you
might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
- This can be set in the tab
-\family sans
-Extra
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-options
-\family default
- of the graphics dialog.
- Choose there the option
-\family sans
-Subfigure
-\family default
- and enter the subcaption for the image in the caption field.
+ This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Referencing subfigures is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+ Figure
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Referencing-Subfigures"
+reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+ is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
+ You can also set the images one below the other.
+ Figure
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+?? and ?? are the subfigures.
+\begin_inset Note Note
+status open
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Fix this when bug 4910 is fixed!
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
- You can also set the images one below the other.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_inset Caption
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Undefinable structure
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "fig:Undefinable-structure"
+
+\end_inset
+
+Undefinable structure.
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_inset Caption
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "fig:A-Platypus"
+
+\end_inset
+A Platypus.
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
You can insert images in any known file format.
But as explained in appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
you can use only the image formats that can directly be embedded in the
output file format.
The output file formats are explained in appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Bitmap
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
\begin_layout Description
Vector
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
\family sans
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Settings
the current row.
A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
of text, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Furthermore, you can mark one or multiple cells of one row as a multicolumn
cell, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
It is also possible to enter a LaTeX-argument which is needed for special
table formattings, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Formal
\family default
will convert the table to a formal table as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
You can also add here space to table rows as decribed in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
that can run over several pages.
Section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
For general explanations about floats, have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
\begin_layout Standard
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
For more information have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
caption
\series default
, which is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Cross
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
reference
\end_inset
Referencing is explained in detail in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
long
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
table
except for the first page, if
\family sans
First
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
header
\family sans
First
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
header
except for the last page, if
\family sans
Last
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footer
\family sans
Last
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footer
\family sans
First
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
header, Footer, Last
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footer.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
See greyed-out note in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
They appear at the bottom of the page where the table cell with the footnote
appears.
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Where the value can have any of the units listed in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LTleft
\series default
to 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
a caption for it.
For this reason you could have the case that e.g.
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.4 follows on Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.1 in the list of tables if there are two longtables without captions.
\begin_layout Standard
This is a reference to Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Its default value is 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in.
\begin_layout Standard
where the width could have one of the units listed in appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
long full title with width set to 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm long full title with width set to 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm long full title with width set to 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
caption with width
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
is used, as in this document, the full page width is used for the caption
when you use the default value of 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in for
\series default
.
To get in this case exactly a 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in wide caption, you can either use a value slightly different from 4.0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in, e.g.
3.99
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in, or the LaTeX-command
The label to reference the table is inserted into the caption of the first
header.
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
characters like the number of table columns before the current column.
In Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To produce Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, create a 3×3 table, mark the first cell and right-click on it.
In the appearing table dialog we set a cell width of 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm and choose centered for the vertical and horizontal alignment.
The vertical alignment is used for all cells of the row.
As our text is smaller than than 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm, only one line will appear.
Therefore you need to insert something, to make the word not being the
first entry.
So add a horizontal space of 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt before the word.
As the space is zero, it doesn't change the output.
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hspace{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To create for example Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
centered alignment
\emph default
and a width of 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm in the table dialog.
The spanned columns should have exactly half the width of the multicolumn
cell, so that you would adjust a width of 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm for the first column.
The second column has then automatically a width of 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm (multicolumn width - width of first column).
This was done for Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
because a cell is always a bit larger than its given width.
Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
as TeX-Code.
According to the command parameters the multirow spans now two rows and
has a width of 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
\begin_layout Standard
Tables are often typeset in books similar to Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Borders
\family default
tab of the table dialog as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
The first and the last table line have a default width of 0.08
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em while the other lines have a default width of 0.05
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\series default
.
You can use all units listed in appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
The default for the width is 0.03
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
l{2pt}
\emph default
means that the line is trimmed from its left end by 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
If you don't specify the trimwidth the lines are trimmed by the default
of 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\end_inset
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cmidrule
\series default
s like in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
The command that was used for the second row of Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
\begin_layout Standard
To align tables vertically in a text line the table must be inside a box.
The box can then be vertically aligned as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Minipages are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
box that has a width of 15
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Raiseboxes are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\family default
.
This was used to create Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
>{}
\series default
is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
You can e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
define the color "
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\begin_layout Standard
To create Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\begin_layout Standard
As described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
It is set to 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt for all tables of this section.
\begin_layout Standard
To color vertical lines for example with green, create the following column
format in the document preamble, according to the description in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
For Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
To color horizontal lines for example with red, like in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
row will add space above the characters of the table row.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Formal tables are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
LyX will insert as default 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em space.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm space top of row
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Bottom
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
row will add space below the characters of the table row.
If the table is a formal table LyX will insert as default 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em space, for normal tables the default size is 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Between
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
rows adds space between the current and the following row.
If the table is a formal table LyX will insert as default 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em space.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm space between row
\end_inset
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm space between row
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Sometimes it looks better when the cell entries of a column are aligned
with a special character, e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
with the decimal separator as in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bottles
\begin_layout Plain Layout
768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixels
\begin_layout Plain Layout
6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
that provides table cell alignments.
But this unfortunately treats the cell entries as math and doesn't allow
formulas in table cells: The first column of Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dcolumn
\series default
like the first column in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and only with some tricks like the expected.
The alignment of the second and third column of Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bottles
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixels
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Calculating the needed width for spanned columns like in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
hspace{0pt}
\series default
avoids the problem of hyphenating the first word, as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To create Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
To set for example a line thickness of 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, like in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
arrayrulewidth
\series default
to 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt in TeX-Code behind the table or table float.
\end_inset
Table with 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt thick lines
\end_inset
To set the line thickness to 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt only for horizontal lines, like in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Table with 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt thick horizontal lines
\end_inset
To set the line thickness to 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt only for vertical lines, create the following column format in the document
preamble, according to the description in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
For Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Table with 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt thick vertical lines
\begin_layout Standard
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
that is used for colored tables in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
\family sans
Margin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Notes
, every float can be referenced in the text.
Floats are therefore numbered.
Referencing is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
paragraph within the float.
More about the caption placement is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Besides figure and table floats that are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
\series bold
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Wrap
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Float
\emph default
.
Algorithm
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
is an example of an algorithm float where -4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm vertical space was added at the end of the float to have the bottom rule
\backslash
floatname{algorithm}{your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name}
where
\family sans
your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\backslash
listof{algorithm}{your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name}
where
\family sans
your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name
, set in the tab
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Options
in the document settings the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
package
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Floats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Wrap
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Float
Installing a LaTeX-package is explained it in the
\emph on
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Configuration
The width and placement of the float is adjusted by right-clicking on the
float box.
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
is an example text wrap float with a width of 40
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Available units are explained in appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note:
\series default
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
wrap float floats are fragile! E.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
having a figure too close to the bottom of the page can mess things up in
, set in the tab
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Options
in the document settings the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
package
\begin_layout Standard
Please also have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
will be inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
LyX offers as text the first words of the caption with a prefix.
The prefix depends on the float type, e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
for figure floats the prefix will be "
The button
\family sans
Go
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Label
\family default
in the cross-reference window sets the cursor before the referred label.
The button text changes then to Go
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Back and you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
\begin_layout Description
<page>: prints the page number: Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
on
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
\begin_layout Description
<reference>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
on
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<page>: prints the float number, the text "on page", and the page number:
\begin_layout Description
Formatted
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
Note that the style <page> won't print the page number if the label is on
the previous, the same, or the next page.
You will e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
see the text
e box.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Referencing Subfigures
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Referencing-Subfigures"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Index
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-References ! to Subfigures
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Currently referencing subfigures is not supported by LyX, so you have to
- use LaTeX-commands.
- The label is the created with the command
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-label{fig:YourLabelName}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-that is directly inserted into the subfigure caption field.
- To reference the label add this command in TeX-Code
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-ref{fig:YourLabelName}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-to the position in your document where the reference should be placed.
- Here is a reference to a subfigure: Subfigure
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset ERT
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-
-\backslash
-ref{fig:Platypus}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Subsection
Automatic Reference Naming
\begin_inset Index
provides a very useful feature that cross-references automatically include
the name of the referenced floats (or text parts like sections).
You save to write e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
the name
in the
\family sans
Formatted
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
reference
\family default
style, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The option
\family sans
Span
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
columns
The option
\family sans
Rotate
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sideways
set the placement for a particular float when you uncheck the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
placement
\begin_layout Description
Here
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
if
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
possible try to place the float on the position where it is inserted
\begin_layout Description
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page try to place the float on the top of the current page
\begin_layout Description
Bottom
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page try to place the float on the bottom of the current page
\begin_layout Description
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
floats try to place the float on an own page
\family sans
Here
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
if
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
possible
, then
\family sans
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family sans
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family default
only floats occupying less than 70
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page can be placed at the top of a page (
\family sans
Bottom
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family default
: only floats occupying less than 30
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page can be placed at the bottom of a page.
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
floats
\family default
: only if more than 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page are occupied by floats, several floats can be set together
option
\family sans
Ignore
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
rules
s behind the rules description above.
To increase for example the often too small default of the bottom-rule
to 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page, add this line to your document preamble:
For this case you can use the option
\family sans
Here
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
definitely
\family sans
[Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
3.2 about here.]
\series default
doesn't provide an automatic translation for the text hint, you have to
do this manually, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
4 in
and use the option
\family sans
Rotate
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sideways
\begin_layout Standard
Referencing rotated floats is the same like for normal floats, the caption
format is also the same: Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To place floats side by side, like for Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Minipages are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
The width is set to 45
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
column% and the box alignment to
The only difference is that the image unit
\family sans
Column
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Width
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
%
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\family default
.
On the LyX screen captions appear as label, e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
in the document preamble.
For example the caption formats of Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
and Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
report (koma-script)
\family default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
), you can alternatively to the
\begin_layout Plain Layout
See section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
report (koma-script)
\family default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
), you can alternatively to the
\begin_layout Standard
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
and Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
This was used for Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TOC
\begin_layout Description
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note This note type is for internal notes that won't appear in the output.
\begin_layout Description
Greyed
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Out This note will appear in the output as grey text.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Framed boxes are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Colored boxes are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to insert notes, a
\family sans
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
\begin_layout Standard
The available colors and the method to define own colors is explained in
section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Framed
\family default
notes is 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; it can be changed by changing the size
\series default
.
The default space between the note content and the frame is 9
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; it can be changed by changing the size
\family default
notes the default space between the note content and the note border is
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; it can be changed by changing the size
definecolor
\series default
command is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
color
\series default
in the preamble, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Footnotes can be referenced like floats: Insert a label into the footnote
and cross-reference this label in the text as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
This is a cross-reference of Footnote
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
To use footnotes within tables, you have to use minipages, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Footnotes within longtables are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
the text, you have to store its number.
For the following footnote mark example, these commands were inserted in
TeX-Code behind Footnote
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, set in the tab
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Options
in the document settings the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
package
If you have several footnotes in one page, they appear without vertical
space between them at the bottom of the page.
To make them better readable you can e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
add 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm space with the following preamble command:
In a two-column document the footnotes appear at the bottom of every column,
see Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
If the footnotes should only appear at the bottom of the right column,
as in Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
In some scientific literature it is usual to collect the footnotes and print
them in a separate paragraph at the the end of a section, like in Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The numbering of endnotes can be changed like the footnote numbering as
described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
@addtoreset
\series default
as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footnotemark
\series default
, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Marginal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
\family default
\series default
Similar to the case described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, long words cannot be hyphenated when they are the first word in a margin
note.
To avoid this, insert 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt horizontal space before the word
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
where the offset is a length with one of the units listed in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family roman
\series medium
For example the margin note beside this text line is shifted up 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm with the TeX-Code-command
\begin_layout Plain Layout
This margin note is shifted up 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm from its original position.
\begin_layout Standard
Boxes are used to format a block of text.
Boxes can be used to write documents with multiple languages, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, to frame texts, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, to prevent words to be hyphenated, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, to align text, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, or to set the background color of texts, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The appearing box dialog offers the
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
Minipage
\family default
is the default for new boxes and is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Parbox
\family default
is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
For an unknown reason you can only set the
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
Boxes without an
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\family default
type and without frames are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
.
The available units for the geometry are explained in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Box height set to 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Depth
\begin_layout Description
Height This is the heigth of the text that is inside the box.
A value of e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2 for this size will set the box heigth to 2 times the text height:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Box height set to 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Height
\begin_layout Description
Total
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Height This is the Height
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Depth:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Box height set to 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Total
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Height
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Box height set to 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Width
When you have chosen an
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\series default
The vertical box aligment can be lost in the output when you have two boxes
in a line and one has e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a shadow and the other one not.
When you have chosen an
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
when you have chosen an
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
If you haven't set an
\family sans
Inner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\begin_layout Description
Rectangular
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box This draws a rectangle frame around the box.
\begin_layout Description
Oval
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
thin This draws an oval frame around the box.
The frame line thickness has the size 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Oval
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
thick This draws an oval frame around the box.
The frame line thickness has the size 0.8
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Shadow
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box This draws a rectangle frame with a shadow around the box.
fboxrule
\series default
, the shadow has a width of 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Double
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box This draws a double-line rectangle frame around the box.
The line thickness of the inner frame is 0.75
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
, the thickness of the outer frame is 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\series default
.
The distance between the lines is 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
fboxrule
\series default
is 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
It can be changed with the following command in TeX-Code to e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt:
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
The space between the frame and the box content is for all frame styles
by default 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Standard
sets the value to 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, like for the following box:
fboxsep
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
sets the diameter to 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
sets the diameter to
\family sans
num
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
×
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
minimum(width and heigth of box)
cornersize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\series default
.
It it set to 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt for the following box by this command:
shadowsize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
Below are two example minipages side by side.
Their width is set to 45
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col% and they are separated by a horizontal fill, that was inserted via
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Special
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Horizontal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Fill
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
The document-wide paragraph settings are ignored within minipages.
That means that there will be no space between paragraphs in minipages
although you set it to e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Minipages can also be used to set a background color for text parts, see
section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Special
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break
\end_inset
You can also define your own color as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To have e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a red background for a word, insert the command
fboxsep
\series default
, respectively, as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Here is an example where the frame line thickness was set to 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm:
\begin_layout Standard
The boxes can be combined in any order.
E.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
the command
\begin_layout Description
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Document Another LyX document; its content is directly inserted to your
\begin_layout Description
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text A text document; every of its text lines is inserted to your document
\begin_layout Description
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Join
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Lines A text document; its text lines are inserted as they are.
\begin_layout Description
External
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Material Files in various formats.
\begin_layout Description
Child
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Document LyX or LaTeX-documents.
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
External
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Material
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
as TeX-Code.
The different methods are compared in Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Graphics
\family default
dialog as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
or as image, depending on the setting in the
\family sans
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
View
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Child
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Documents
The included example document has for example a subsection that is numbered
as subsection of this section.
Labels of included documents can be referenced: Subsection
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Input files can be previewed in LyX when
\family sans
Instant
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Preview
is enabled in LyX's preferences under
\family sans
Look
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text
\begin_layout Description
Listings This type is described in chapter
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The placement option
\family sans
Inline
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
listing
\end_inset
corresponding to the float placement options described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
The placement options can be mixed and are inserted without any separation,
e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
.
Listings can be referenced like floats: Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
In section
\family sans
Line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
numbering
The option
\family sans
Extended
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
chars
\end_inset
Extended
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
chars
\end_inset
Space
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
as
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Symbol
\end_inset
, range lines 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
8:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
The other child document types are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
is an example for a listing of a file; there the lines 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
15 of this LyX file are listed.
in the
\family sans
Listings
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
settings
\begin_layout Standard
To understand the units described in this documentation, Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
point (72.27
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
pica (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
scaled point (65536
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
sp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
big point (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
didot (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd
\end_inset
0.376
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
cicero (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
math unit (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mu = 1/18
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ps2pdf) This uses the program
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(dvipdfm) This uses the program
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex) This uses the program
It is recommended to use
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
that uses
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\begin_layout Chapter
Explanation of Equation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
is the LaTeX-length between the cell text and the cell border, its default
value is 6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
arrayrulewidth
\series default
is the thickness of the cell border line, the default is 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Standard
Following equation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
By setting equation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-#LyX 1.6.0svn created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 334
+#LyX 1.6.0beta2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 335
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
\begin_layout Standard
For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
at Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\emph on
eX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Configuration
\end_inset
eX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Configuration
is printed with sub- and superscript letters.
More on ERT is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
New
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
from
\bar under
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Save
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
As
\family sans
Revert
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
saved
\family sans
Version
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Control
\family sans
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
New
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
from
\bar under
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
(see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Revert
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
saved
and
\family sans
Version
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Control
\family sans
Revert
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
saved
With
\family sans
Version
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Control
\family sans
Paste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Recent
\family sans
Paste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Special
\family sans
Find
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Replace
The submenu of
\family sans
Paste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Recent
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Paste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text, Join
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Lines
Without
\family sans
Join
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Lines
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Find
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Replace
item opens the
\family sans
Find
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Replace
button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
\family sans
Replace
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
with
You can click the
\family sans
Find
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Next
Hit
\family sans
Replace
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
All
The
\family sans
Case
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sensitive
Some keys, like
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Up
,
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Down
\family default
There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
If you don't understand this, go read sections
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, especially section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Home
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
e
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
s
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
f
\begin_layout Description
curiculum
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
\begin_layout Description
SPIE
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
\end_inset
Max.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sectioning level
\family default
headings, and so on.
We'll describe these headings fully in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
field under
\family sans
Documents
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
classes
Under
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Layout
Separation
\family default
of paragraphs is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
You'll find the following options in the menu
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Layout
\family sans
Two-sided
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
document
in the submenu
\family sans
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Layout
\begin_layout Standard
where length is a value in one of the units listed in Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
The default length is 30
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Paragraph
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Settings
dialog and toggle the
\family sans
Indent
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Paragraph
dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
\family sans
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Layout.
LyX will still reset the nesting depth, however.
Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
after each name means that these headings are not numbered.
They work the same as their numbered counterparts but won't appear in the
table of contents, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Under
\family sans
Numbering
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TOC
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Short
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Title
is nested.
If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
you read all of section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Itemize
See section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
We'll explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
environments than we've stated here.
You should read section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Protected
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
\family default
, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Second
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Example: This one shows how to use a
\family sans
Protected
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Blank
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
item
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
labels LyX uses the first
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
label
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Paragraph
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Settings
The text in the box
\family sans
Longest
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
label
as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
\family sans
Longest
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
label
so on.
They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
Read section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
HFills
\family default
later in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Right One
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Center
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
One
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
Similarly, the
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
That was
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
or
\family sans
Formatting
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break
or
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
class, we can't do this.
We inserted it therefore as figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
For a detailed description of LyX's bibliography handling, have a look at
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
key is treated as a
\family sans
Protected
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Blank
Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
\family sans
Increase
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Depth
or
\family sans
Decrease
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Depth
\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
Fully
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Nestable You can nest them.
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
\family sans
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Floats
and
\family sans
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Floats
\end_inset
Have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
and
\family sans
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Address
\begin_layout Address
Dear Mr.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Fizlewitz:
Protected
\bar under
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
.
The length units are listed in Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Some languages (e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
ntence punctuation mark, and LyX honors those conventions (see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Quote
D.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
E.
Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program, i.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
TeX.
\end_inset
10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
kg (thin space)
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Thin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
\begin_layout Description
Negative
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
thin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
space A line with a
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \negthinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Enspace
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em) A line with a
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \enskip{}
+\begin_inset space \enskip{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
Enspace (0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em) space between the arrows.
\begin_layout Description
Quad
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em) A line with a
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \quad{}
+\begin_inset space \quad{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
Quad
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em) space between the arrows.
\begin_layout Description
QQuad
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em) A line with a
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \qquad{}
+\begin_inset space \qquad{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
QQuad
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em) space between the arrows.
\begin_layout Description
Custom
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
space A line with
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace{}
\length 2cm
\end_inset
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm space between the arrows.
\begin_layout Standard
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1/3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1/3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1/6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1/6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Enspace (0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Quad (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Plain Layout
QQuad (2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
\begin_layout Quote
\noindent
This is on the left side
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
This is on the right
\begin_layout Quote
\noindent
Left
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Middle
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Right
\begin_layout Quote
\noindent
Left
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
1/3 Left
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Right
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
one
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
two :three
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
four
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
five
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
six
\end_inset
Mr.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Edge would have been jumps the gun.
\end_inset
Mr.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Edge
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Vertical
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
HFill
\family default
s are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Custom
\family default
are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
New
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Clear
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Clear
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Double
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Ragged
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Justified
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break
There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
set a linebreak, e.g.
in a poem or for an address (see sections
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Horizontal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Line
\begin_layout Description
Vector
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fonts
, and
\family typewriter
Type
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1 PostScript
\begin_layout Description
Bitmap
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fonts
Bitmap fonts are named
\family typewriter
Type
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
3
font shapes roman (serif),
\family sans
sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif
This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
\family typewriter
Adobe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Reader
\end_inset
e +
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
̀
, consists of these three main font types
\family sans
sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif
:
\family sans
Times
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Roman
Helvetica
\family default
scaled to 92 or 95
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% as sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif font, and
The differences between roman,
\family sans
sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif
typewriter
\family default
fonts are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The font
\family sans
Times
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Roman
Therefore
\family sans
Times
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Roman
You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
\family sans
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\family default
dialog if needed.
The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Preferences
\family default
dialog, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
use the keybinding
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
c
using the keybindings
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
e
You can always reset to the default font using the keybinding
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
\family sans
No
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
change
The font properties, and their options (in addition to
\family sans
No
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
change
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
r
\begin_layout Plain Layout
The LaTeX-command prevents text to be broken at the end of a line.
It is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Serif
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
s
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
p
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
b
\family sans
Small
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Caps
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
t
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
S
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
s
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
n
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
l
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
S-L
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
h
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
H
\family sans
M-s
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
u
Normally it's equivalent to
\family sans
Small
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Caps
Besides
\family sans
No
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
color
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
To completely reset the character style to the default, use
\family sans
M-c
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
), set the
\family sans
Toggle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
all
,
\family sans
sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif
\begin_layout Plain Layout
For more on phantoms see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
We cover these informations in much greater detail in the
\emph on
Extended
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Features
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(dvipdfm) This uses the program
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex) This uses the program
We recommend to use
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\family sans
View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
You can set the parameters in the
\family sans
Print
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Destination
\family default
has to be configured for this printer name.
The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Enumerate
hyphen
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
made with
\begin_layout Enumerate
en dash
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
--
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
made with
\begin_layout Enumerate
em dash
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
---
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
made with
\begin_layout Enumerate
minus sign
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
a
\begin_layout Enumerate
line- and page-breaks
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
(
\begin_layout Enumerate
From A--Z
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
(
\begin_layout Enumerate
Oh --- there's a dash.
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
(
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
(
and
\family sans
German
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(new
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
spelling)
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Hyphenation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Point
\begin_layout Standard
To learn more about ERT, have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Use an
\family sans
Inter-word
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
\family default
after lowercase abbreviations (see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Use a
\family sans
Thin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
\family default
between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Use an
\family sans
End
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sentence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
period
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Special
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Character
\begin_layout Itemize
e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
this is too much space!
\family sans
Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Check
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TeX
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Ligature
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break.
\end_inset
For more about ERT, look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Thin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space
\begin_layout Plain Layout
24
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
kW
\begin_layout Plain Layout
24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
kW
There's no way we can go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page,
or how you can tweak that behavior.
Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography [such as
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
or
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note This note type is for internal notes that won't appear in the output.
\begin_layout Description
Greyed
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Out This note will appear in the output as grey text.
\end_inset
In contrary to framed boxes like the one in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Marginal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
factor.
The scaling units are explained in Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Get
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
from
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
file
The option
\family sans
Clip
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
bounding
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
box
\family default
option here if the image is inside a figure float.
This option is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The option
\family sans
Draft
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mode
\begin_layout Standard
If you need image captions and want to reference images, you have to put
the image into a float, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
You can insert images in any known file format.
But as we explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
in the background to convert the images to the right format.
To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
you can use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Bitmap
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
\begin_layout Description
Scalable
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
Additionally to the table dialog the
\family sans
table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
toolbar
, that appears when the cursor is inside a table, helps you in setting table
properties.
It is for example currently only possible to add
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
delete lines via the table toolbar.
In the tab
\family sans
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Settings
is given.
A given width will allow the cell to have linebreaks and multiple paragraphs
of text, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
explained in the tables section of the
\emph on
Extended
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Features
If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
long
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
table
except for the first page, if
\family sans
First
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
header
\family sans
First
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
header
except for the last page, if
\family sans
Last
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footer
\family sans
Last
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footer
In this context, first means first in this order:
\family sans
Footer, Last
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footer,
\family sans
First
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
header.
and
\family sans
Margin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Notes
, every float can be referenced in the text.
Floats are therefore numbered.
Referencing is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
.
A box with a caption that has e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
the label
\end_inset
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
\series bold
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
Set the cursor above this label (or before it and press enter) and insert
the image as described above to get the caption printed below the image.
This is what we did for Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
If you want the caption to be above the image, set the cursor at the end
of the caption, press enter and insert the image.
This was done in Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
This figure float show also how to set a label and create a cross-reference
to it.
As described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Normally one inserts only one image to a figure float, but sometimes you
+Normally only one image is inserted to a figure float, but sometimes you
might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
- This can be done in the graphics dialog: Right-click on an image and go
- to the tab
-\family sans
-Extra
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-options
-\family default
- in the appearing dialog, use the option
-\family sans
-Subfigure
-\family default
-, and enter the subcaption for the image in the now enabled caption field.
+ This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
+ Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures.
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
You can also set the images one below the other.
+ Figure
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+?? and ?? are the subfigures.
+\begin_inset Note Note
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Fix this when bug 4910 is fixed!
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_inset Caption
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "fig:Undefinable"
+
+\end_inset
+
Undefinable
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_inset Caption
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "fig:Platypus"
+
+\end_inset
+
Platypus
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Note that the caption is added to the
\family sans
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Figures
\family default
as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
They have the same properties as figure floats except of the different
label.
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX-Code
\family default
, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\backslash
floatname{algorithm}{your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name}
\series bold
your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Wrap
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Float
Installing a LaTeX-package is explained it in the
\emph on
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Configuration
The width and placement of the float is adjusted by right-clicking on the
float box.
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
is for example a figure wrap float with a width of 40
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Available units are explained in Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and use the option
\family sans
Rotate
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sideways
\begin_layout Standard
Referencing rotated floats is the same like for normal floats, the caption
format is also the same: Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The option
\family sans
Span
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
columns
The option
\family sans
Rotate
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sideways
\family default
is used to rotate floats, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
set the placement for a particular float when you uncheck the option
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
placement
\begin_layout Description
Here
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
if
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
possible: try to place the float on the position where it is inserted
\begin_layout Description
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page: try to place the float on the top of the current page
\begin_layout Description
Bottom
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page: try to place the float on the bottom of the current page
\begin_layout Description
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
floats: try to place the float on an own page
\family sans
Here
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
if
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
possible
, then
\family sans
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family sans
Top
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family default
only floats occupying less than 70
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page can be placed at the top of a page
\family sans
Bottom
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family default
: only floats occupying less than 30
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page can be placed at the bottom of a page.
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
floats
\family default
: only if more than 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% of the page are occupied by floats, several floats can be set together
option
\family sans
Ignore
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
rules
For this case you can use the option
\family sans
Here
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
definitely
LaTeX provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page,
called minipage.
Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
apply.
Horizontal Fills
\family default
as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
with the
\family sans
math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
toolbar
So typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
in the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
Roots can be created using the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Limits
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Type
\series default
.
Have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Most math symbols can be found in the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
you don't have to use the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
or to use the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
The
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
\begin_layout Standard
For some mathematical objects, like the limes, the macro changes the way
that subscripts are placed, like described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
in a formula.
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
\family sans
Frame
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
decorations
or if you have several layers of brackets, is better using
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
If you use the option
\family sans
Keep
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
matched
Matrices are entered in LyX using the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
\end_inset
The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Cases
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Environment
).
The other types are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Toggle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Numbering
or the shortcut
\family sans
M-m
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
n
Using
\family sans
M-m
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
n
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Toggle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Numbering
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Line
or the shortcut
\family sans
M-m
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
N
To number all lines use the shortcut
\family sans
M-m
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
n
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Cross
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Reference
\begin_layout Standard
The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Number
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Arguments
To set a font in a formula, use the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
\end_inset
, or enter its command, listed in table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Font
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Change
the entry
\family sans
Normal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mode
of the
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panel
(alternatively the shortcut
\family sans
M-m
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
m
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
Selecting the checkbox
\family sans
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
package
dialog under
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Options
\begin_layout Standard
Item
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
<page>: prints the page number: Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
on
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
\begin_layout Description
<reference>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
on
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<page>: prints the float number, the text "on page", and the page number:
\begin_layout Description
Formatted
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
Note that the style <page> won't print the page number if the label is on
the previous, the same, or the next page.
You will e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
see the text
to reference a float, put the label in the caption.
For footnotes you can put the label somewhere in it.
Referencing formulas is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The button
\family sans
Go
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Label
The button text changes then to
\family sans
Go
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Back
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Contents
The TOC lists every numbered section automatically.
If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
Section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TOC
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Start
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Here
\begin_layout Standard
Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
; Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bibliography
\family default
, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
eX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bibliography
\end_inset
eX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
command
\end_inset
Chapter
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
3
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Index
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Entry
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Index
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
List
\end_inset
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
for the enumerated list in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
E.g if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an index entry
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
and another entry at the end of section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
(in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\backslash
command{page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
number}
\series default
.
Have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
It can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences dialog,
see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
N
\family sans
omenclature
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Entry
\begin_layout Standard
(A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
You cannot use the
\family sans
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
sets the fonts to
\family sans
sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif
To control the sort order, you can edit the
\family sans
Sort
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
as
\backslash
nomnorefeq,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\backslash
nomnorefpage,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Lists
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\family roman
Where the width is a value with one of the units listed in Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
The default value is 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
as explained below, and turn on
\family sans
Instant
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
preview
dialog under
\family sans
Look
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
generated just by selecting the
\family sans
Instant
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
preview
It will also generate previews of included insets if you select the
\family sans
Show
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
preview
\family sans
View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
View
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Source
But you can use the
\family sans
Find
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Replace
\begin_layout Description
Escape
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
\begin_layout Description
Personal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dictionary to use a different file than the spell checker's default choice
\begin_layout Description
Accept
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
compound
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
\begin_layout Description
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
input
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
encoding Uses the document encoding that is set in the
\begin_layout Plain Layout
The encodings are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Track
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Changes
You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
\family sans
Look
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
feel
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Track
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Changes
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Show
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Changes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
in
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Output
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Accept
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Change
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Reject
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Change
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Merge
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Changes
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Accept
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
All
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Changes
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Change
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Reject
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
All
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Changes
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
\family sans
Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Next
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
\begin_layout Standard
Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
For details abhout the different encoding options see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
you can configure LyX to use an Italian keymap.
The preferences dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Standard
¨ Ä Ë Ï Ö Ü ä ë ï ö ü ÿ
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
diaeresis
\begin_layout Standard
^ Â Ê Î Ô Û â ê î ô û
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
circumflex
\begin_layout Standard
` À È Ì Ò Ù à è ì ò ù
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
grave
\begin_layout Standard
´ Á É Í Ó Ú Ý á é í ó ú ý
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
acute
\begin_layout Standard
~ Ã Ñ Õ ã ñ õ
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
tilde
\begin_layout Standard
¸Çç
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
cedilla
\begin_layout Standard
¯
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
macron
\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Standard
ĤĴĥĵĈĜŜĉĝŝ
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
circumflex
\begin_layout Standard
ŚŹśźŔĹĆŃŕĺćń
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
acute
\begin_layout Standard
Ĩı̃Ũũ
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
tilde
\begin_layout Standard
ŞşŢţŖĻĢŗļģŅĶņķ
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
cedilla
\begin_layout Standard
ĒēĀĪŌŪāı̄ōū
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
macron
\begin_layout Standard
ŐŰőű
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
Hungarian umlaut
of the
\emph on
Extended
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Features
When using the menu
\family sans
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text, Join
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Lines
\begin_layout Standard
Here is a list of all available entries; they are explained in detail in
section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
CJK
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
\begin_layout Description
HTML
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(MS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
\end_inset
eX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\end_inset
eX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(plain)
\begin_layout Description
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1.y.x LyX-document in a format readable for the LyX versions 1.y.x (
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(dvipdfm)
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\family sans
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
text
\family sans
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ps2ascii)
,
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\family default
is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
.
For more informations have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dialog under
\family sans
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Layout
These two menus are only active when the cursor is inside a table or a formula.
The properties of this table/formula can now be changed.
The properties of tables are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, the properties of formulas in chapter
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
These menus are only active when the cursor is in an environment that can
be nested.
They in/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The menu entries for the viewing formats are not the same on all installations
- it depends on the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
All possible formats are formats listed in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
and
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
.
If one of the two is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
All toolbars and the
\family sans
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Buffer
,
\family sans
Math
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Panels
\begin_layout Standard
LyX's toolbars and its buttons are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
End
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
of
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Ordinary
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Quote Inserts this quote:
\begin_layout Description
Single
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Quote Inserts this quote:
\begin_layout Description
Menu
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\begin_layout Description
Phonetic
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Symbols
\begin_layout Description
Protected
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Inter-word
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Thin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Horizontal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Fill Inserts an horizontal fill, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Horizontal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Line Inserts an horizontal line, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Vertical
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Space Inserts vertical space, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Hyphenation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Point Inserts an hyphenation point, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Ligature
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break Inserts a forced linebreak, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Break Inserts a forced pagebreak, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Clear
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page Inserts a clear pagebreak, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Clear
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Double
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Various lists can be inserted with this menu.
The table of contents, the algorithm, figures, and tables list are described
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
The index list is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, the nomenclature in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, and the BibTeX bibliography in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To insert floats, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
To insert notes, described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts branch insets as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a minipage box that is described section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a citation as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a label as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a caption to floats or longtables.
Floats are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts an index entry as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a table.
Tables are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a graphic.
Graphics are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts an URL box as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a footnote, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a marginal note, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts a short title, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Inserts an ERT box, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
This is useful when you are working on a large documents and often have
to jump e.g.
between section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.5 and 6.3.
To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.5 and use the menu
\family sans
Save
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bookmark
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1
\family default
.
Then go to section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
6.3 and use
\family sans
Save
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bookmark
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Change Tracking is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
position as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Here you set the document class, class options, and a Postscript driver.
Document classes are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
The document font settings are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
A description of this menu is given in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
default Same as
\begin_layout Standard
You can adjust here the numbering depth of sections headings as described
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
For a further description see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
The itemize environment is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Branches are described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
An introduction in the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Spell checking is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
The thesaurus is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
This menu reconfigures LyX.
That means LyX looks for Latex@LaTeX-packages and needed programs, see
also section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
The menu
\family sans
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Configuration
\family default
shows a LyX-document with informations about the Latex@LaTeX-packages and
classes found by LyX (see also section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Find
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Replace
\family sans
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\family sans
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Inline
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Formula
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Increase
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Depth
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Decrease
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
List
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Depth
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Index
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Entry
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Nomenclature
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Entry
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Marginal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Note
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Child
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Document
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Text
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Style
\family sans
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Paragraph
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Settings
\begin_layout Standard
The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mac.bind set of bindings for
\family sans
Mac
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
OS
When the option
\family sans
Save
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
restore window size, or use fixed size
With the option
\family sans
Save
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
restore window position
\family sans
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Open
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Recent
So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
aesthetics.
Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
OS and Windows.
(depends on the system) as
\family sans
sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
serif
is the screen resolution in dpi (dots per inch).
The Font Sizes are calculated as letter height in units of points.
72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
points have the size of 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
inch, see Appendix
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pt would be used.
The sizes are explained in detail in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
enables previewing snippets of your document.
This feature is described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Normally keyboard settings have to be done in a menu of your operating system.
For the case that this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
If you have e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a Czech keyboard but want to write with it like with a Romanian one, you
\begin_layout Description
Working
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
directory This is LyX's working directory.
or
\family sans
Save
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
as
\begin_layout Description
Document
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
\family sans
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
New
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
from
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Template
\begin_layout Description
Backup
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
directory
Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
When no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Temporary
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
\begin_layout Description
PATH
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems while
LyX is configured, so that you normally don't have to modify it.
On Unix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
Here you can insert your name and email address.
The identity will be used when you have enabled change tracking as described
in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
language is the language used in new documents
\begin_layout Description
Language
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
package is a LaTeX-command to load a LaTeX-package that handles language
\begin_layout Plain Layout
For an introduction to the LaTeX-Syntax, have a look at section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
start When a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
\begin_layout Description
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
end Counterpart to
\begin_layout Description
Use
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
babel Whether
\begin_layout Description
Auto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
begin When this option is set, the documents starts with the chosen document
When this option is not set, the
\family sans
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
start
This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
\family sans
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
start
\begin_layout Description
Auto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
end Counterpart to
\family sans
Auto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
begin
When it is not set, the
\family sans
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
end
\begin_layout Description
Mark
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
foreign
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
\begin_layout Description
Right
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
left
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
language
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left, like Arabic,
\begin_layout Standard
The spellchecker settings are explained in section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
printer Here you can specify the name of your default printer.
\begin_layout Description
Adapt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
output
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
to
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
printer This option works only for the
\begin_layout Description
Printer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
command is the command LyX
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
LaTeX uses for printing.
\begin_layout Description
Printer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Command
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Options Here you can specify printer options.
\begin_layout Description
Output
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
line
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Plain
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
text
\begin_layout Description
roff
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
command defines an additional command used to produce better ASCII tables
\end_inset
X
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
\begin_layout Description
Default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paper
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
\begin_layout Description
Reset
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
class
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
options
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
when
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
document
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
classes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
changes Removes all manually set document class options in the
\end_inset
X
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
command Command for the program
\end_inset
X
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
command Command for the program
BibTeX
\family default
that generates the bibliography, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Index
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
command Command for the program that generates the index, see section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
DVI
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
viewer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paper
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
size
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
options They only have an effect when the program
and/or
\family sans
Extra
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
flag
in the
\family sans
From
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
format
and
\family sans
GUI
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name
\begin_layout Plain Layout
point (72.27
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
pica (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
scaled point (65536
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
sp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
big point (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
didot (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd
\end_inset
37.6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
cicero (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
math unit (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mu = 1/18
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
-#LyX 1.6.0svn created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 334
+#LyX 1.6.0beta2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 335
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
Hier können Sie eine Grafik-Datei auswählen und ihr Aussehen in der druckbaren
Version festlegen.
Die für die Bildgröße verfügbaren Einheiten werden im Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Winkel
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Um das zu vermeiden, sollten Sie
\family sans
Seitenverhältnis
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
beibehalten
Wenn Sie auf
\family sans
Lese
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
aus
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Datei
Die Option
\family sans
Auf
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Begrenzungsbox
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
zuschneiden
\family sans
LaTeX-
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
und
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX-Optionen
festlegen, ob die Abbildung ein Teil einer gleitenden Abbildung mit eigener
Beschriftung sein soll.
Teilabbildungen werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Die Option
\family sans
Beim
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Exportieren
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
nicht
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
entpacken
Gepackte EPS-Dateien sparen Platz, wenn Sie als Ausgebe-Format PostScript
wählen, siehe Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Abbildungsformate sind in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
In das rot umrahmte Feld rechts von
\emph on
Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Nr:
Nach einem Klick oberhalb oder unterhalb von
\emph on
Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Nr:
\end_inset
oberhalb oder wie Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
unterhalb der Bildbeschriftung einfügen.
Näheres über Bildbeschriftungen erfahren Sie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\emph default
sein.
Verweise werden detailliert in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Normalerweise wird eine Gleitabbildung nur aus einem Bild bestehen, aber
- manchmal benötigt man mehrere Bilder mit unterschiedlichen Beschriftungen
- nebeneinander.
- Das erreicht man mit der Karteikarte
-\family sans
-LaTe
-\begin_inset ERT
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-X-
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-und
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-LyX-Optionen
-\family default
- des
-\family sans
-Grafik
-\family default
--Dialoges.
- Kreuzen Sie dort
-\family sans
-Teilabbildung
-\family default
- an und geben die Beschriftung des Bildes im Feld
-\family sans
-Legende
-\family default
- ein.
+ manchmal benötigt man mehrere Bilder mit unterschiedlichen Beschriftungen.
+ Das erreicht man, indem man weitere Gleitabbildungen in eine bestehende
+ Gleitabbildung einfügt.
Beachten Sie, dass im Abbildungsverzeichnis nur die Hauptbeschriftung erscheint.
- Verweise auf Teilabbildungen werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+ Abbildung
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "uab:Auf-Teilabbildungen-verweisen"
+reference "abb:Zwei-Teilabbildungen"
\end_inset
- beschrieben.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+ ist ein Beispiel für eine Gleitabbildung mit zwei Teilabbildungen nebeneinander.
+ Sie können die Bilder auch untereinander setzen, indem Sie nach der ersten
+ Gleitabbildung auf Eingabe drücken.
+ Abbildung
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+?? und ?? sind die Teilabbildungen.
+\begin_inset Note Note
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "abb:Zwei-Teilabbildungen"
+\lang english
+Fix this when bug 4910 is fixed!
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist ein Beispiel für eine Gleitabbildung mit zwei Teilabbildungen nebeneinander
-- Sie können sie auch untereinander setzen, indem Sie nach dem ersten Bild
- auf Eingabe drücken.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Sie können Bilder in jedem bekannten Dateiformat einfügen.
Aber wie in Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Dazu sollten Sie nur Bildformate benutzen, die direkt in die Ausgabe eingefügt
werden können.
Diese Formate werden in Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
einfügen.
Wenn Sie auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf klicken, sehen Sie eine 5×5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Tabelle.
Hier können Sie die
\family sans
Horizontale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ausrichtung
festgelegt haben, können Sie auch eine
\family sans
Vertikale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ausrichtung
der momentanen Zeile wählen.
Bei einer festen Spaltenbreite können Zellen Zeilenumbrüche und mehrere
Absätze haben, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Mehrfachspalte
\family default
definieren, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Formal
\family default
benutzen, wird die Tabelle in eine formale Tabelle, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Hier können Sie auch zusätzliche Abstände für Zeilen festlegen, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Hier kann eine Tabelle als
\family sans
Lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
\family default
definiert werden, die über mehrere Seiten reicht.
Die Abschnitte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
,
\family sans
Zeilen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Spalten
\begin_layout Standard
Allgemeine Erklärungen über Gleitobjekte finden Sie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
In das rot umrahmte Feld rechts von
\emph on
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Nr:
Nach einem Klick oberhalb oder unterhalb von
\emph on
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Nr:
\begin_layout Standard
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Näheres finden Sie im Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
caption
\series default
, das in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
verweisen.
Verweise werden detailliert in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
auf der Karteikarte
\family sans
Lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
die Option
\family sans
Lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
verwenden
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Die Bedeutung diese Befehle finden Sie in der Bemerkung 1 von Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Fußnoten kann man in jede Zelle einer langen Tabelle einfügen.
Sie werden auf der Seite erscheinen, auf der auch die Zelle gedruckt wird.
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Wobei der Wert eine der in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LTleft
\series default
auf den Wert 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt gesetzt wurde.
Eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Erstellen Sie eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Hier ist eine kleine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
\series bold
Bemerkung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1:
Die Tabellennummer wird für jede
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
\family default
erhöht, auch wenn Sie keinen Titel vergeben.
Deshalb könnte es passieren, dass zum Beispiel Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.4 auf Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.1 im Tabellenverzeichnis folgt, wenn dazwischen zwei
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabellen
Um das zu vermeiden, können Sie hinter jede
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
\series bold
Bemerkung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2:
für Querverweise benutzen, wird der Verweis auf eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Querverweise auf
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
\family sans
Lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Damit auf eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
\begin_layout Standard
Dies ist ein Verweis auf Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
definiert.
Ihr Standardwert ist 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Zoll (
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm).
Breite
\family default
eine der in Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Langer Titel mit 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm Breite, Langer Titel mit 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm Breite, Langer Titel mit 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm Breite, Langer Titel mit 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm Breite
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Titel mit 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm Breite
verwendet wird, so wie in diesem Dokument, wird die ganze Seitenbreite
für die Beschriftung verwendet, wenn Sie den voreingestellten Wert von
4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Zoll für
\series default
benutzen.
Um in diesem Fall eine genau a 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Zoll breite Beschriftung zu erhalten, können Sie entweder einen leicht von
4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Zoll veränderten Wert wie z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
3.99
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Zoll verwenden oder den LaTeX-Befehl
in eine leere Legende-Zeile, die als
\family sans
Erste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Kopfzeile
den Titel der
\family sans
Ersten
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Kopfzeile
\family default
eingefügt werden.
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ist ein Beispiel für eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Es kann Probleme geben, wenn sich auf derselben Seite, auf der eine
\family sans
lange
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Um das zu vermeiden, können Sie vor der
\family sans
langen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
als TeX-Code einfügen wie Spalten vor der momentanen Spalte sind.
In Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Wenn die Fußzeile Ihrer
\family sans
langen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabelle
Wenn Sie für eine Spalte eine feste Breite definieren, können Sie Text als
Absätze mit mehrfachen Zeilen und Silbentrennung eingeben.
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Tabellen-Einstellungen
\family default
-Dialog auf 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm gesetzt und die vertikalen und horizontalen Ausrichtungen zentriert.
Weil unser Text schmaler als 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm ist, würde er in einer Zeile gedruckt werden.
Tabellen-Einstellungen
\family default
-Dialog auf 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm und die vertikale Ausrichtung auf zentriert.
Wenn Sie LaTeX trotzdem die Trennung überlassen wollen, müssen Sie vor
dem Wort etwas einfügen, damit es nicht wie der erste Eintrag aussieht.
Fügen sie daher 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt horizontalen Abstand vor dem Wort ein.
Weil er keinen Platz belegt, ändert er die Druckausgabe nicht.
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hspace{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
keine Mehrfachzeile ist, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Um Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
an, setzen die
\family sans
Horizontale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ausrichtung
Breite
\family default
auf 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
Die überspannten Spalten werden dann auf die halbe Breite gesetzt, indem
Sie die Breite der ersten Spalte auf 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm setzen.
Die zweite Spalte wird dann automatisch 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm breit (Breite der
Breite der ersten Spalte).
Dies wurde so für Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ist, sondern ein wenig mehr.
Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
cm, und damit wird aus Gleichung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
der Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
als TeX-Code die Mehrfachzeile definiert.
Sie besteht aus zwei Zeilen und einer Breite von 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
\begin_layout Standard
Tabellen werden in Büchern oft wie Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
gen
\family default
-Dialogs hinzugefügt werden, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Die horizontalen können wie für normale Tabellen gesetzt werden, sehen
gedruckt aber anders aus.
Die erste und letzte Linie ist 0.08
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em dick, während die anderen 0.05
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em dick sind.
Breite
\family default
können Sie alle Einheiten benutzen, die in Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Der Standardwert ist 0.03
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
l{2pt}
\emph default
zum Beispiel bedeutet, dass die Linie links um 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt gekürzt wird.
Ohne Breitenangabe werden die Linien um 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em gekürzt.
\end_inset
In Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cmidrule
\series default
auch überlappende Linien wie in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
In Zeile zwei der Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
Damit Tabellen vertikal im Text ausgerichtet werden können, müssen sie in
einer Box sein.
Die Box kann dann vertikal ausgerichtet werden, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Minipages werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
mit 15
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%-Breite:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Raiseboxen werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Textstil
\family default
-Dialog wie es in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
>{}
\series default
finden Sie im Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Die Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
definiert werden.
Für alle Tabellenlinien in diesem Kapitel wird sie auf 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt gesetzt.
\begin_layout Standard
Um die vertikalen Linien für dieses Beispiel grün zu färben, wurde im LaTeX-Vors
pann folgendes Spaltenformat entsprechend der Beschreibung in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
In Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Um zum Beispiel horizontale Linien rot zu färben wie in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-Dialogs können Sie
\family sans
zusätzliche
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Abstände
\begin_layout Description
Oberhalb
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zeile fügt oberhalb des Zeileninhalts zusätzlichen Leerraum ein.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Formale Tabellen wurden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
fügt LyX standardmäßig 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em Leerraum ein.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm Leerraum oberhalb der Zeile
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Unterhalb
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zeile fügt unterhalb des Zeileninhalts zusätzlichen Leerraum ein.
Bei einer formalen Tabelle fügt LyX standardmäßig 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em Leerraum ein.
Bei normalen Tabellen ist der Standardwert 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Zwischen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
den
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zeilen fügt zwischen zwei Zeilen zusätzlichen Leerraum ein.
Bei einer formalen Tabelle fügt LyX standardmäßig 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em Leerraum ein.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm Leerraum zwischen den Zeilen
\end_inset
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm Leerraum zwischen den Zeilen
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Manchmal sieht es besser aus, wenn Spalten nach besonderen Zeichen ausgerichtet
sind wie zum Beispiel den Dezimalpunkt wie in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Für die Ausrichtung der Relationen müssen Sie den
\family sans
Mittleren
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Abstand
\color black
24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\color black
768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixel
\color black
6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
Aber es behandelt den Zelleninhalt als Mathematik und erlaubt keine Formeln
in den Zellen.
Die erste Spalte von Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dcolumn
\family default
wie die erste Spalte von Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
aussehen und nur mit ein paar Tricks wie erwartet.
Die Ausrichtung der zweiten und dritten Spalte wie in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Wenn man wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
das Problem mit der Silbentrennung des ersten Wortes vermeidet, wie in
Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Diese Format benutzt Gleichung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Für Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
eingestellt werden.
Um eine Liniendicke von 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, wie in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tabelle mit 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt Liniendicke
\end_inset
Um eine Liniendicke von 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt nur für horizontale Linien zu bekommen, wie in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tabelle mit 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt dicken horizontalen Linien
\end_inset
Um die Liniendicke von 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt nur für vertikale Linien zu bekommen, müssen Sie im LaTeX-Vorspann folgendes
Spaltenformat entsprechend der Beschreibung in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
In Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tabelle mit 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt dicken vertikalen Linien
\begin_layout Standard
als TeX-Code als erstes in die erste Zelle einer Zeile eingefügt.
Wenn Sie z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
\begin_layout Standard
In Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, das für die farbigen Tabellen in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
kann im Text auf ein Gleitobjekt verwiesen werden.
Gleitobjekte sind deshalb nummeriert.
Querverweise werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
flos\SpecialChar \-
se\SpecialChar \-
nes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Gleitobjekt
Algorithmus, Abbildung oder Tabelle werden ober- oder unterhalb des Titels
eingefügt.
In Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Neben Gleitobjekt-Abbildungen und -Tabellen, die bereits in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\emph default
.
In Algorithmus
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
wurden am Ende -0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm vertikaler Abstand eingefügt, damit die untere Linie direkt unter der
\family sans
Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Liste
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator
benutzen zu können, muss in den
\family sans
Mathe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Optionen
\family sans
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Mathe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Paket
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Umflossenes
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
Gleit\SpecialChar \-
Wie man ein LaTeX-Paket installiert, wird im Handbuch
\emph on
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Konfiguration
das
\family sans
Umflossenes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Gleitobjekt
\family default
-Kästchen ändern.
Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
ist zum Beispiel ein textumflossenes Objekt, das 40
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% der Spaltenbreite einnimmt.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Die benutzbaren Einheiten werden in Anhang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family typewriter
1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em
zu können, müssen Sie in den
\family sans
Mathe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Optionen
\family sans
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Mathe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Paket
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Sehen Sie sich bitte auch Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ein Klick auf den Schalter
\family sans
Gehe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
zur
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Marke
Der Text der Schaltfläche heißt jetzt
\family sans
Gehe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
zurück
Dann ist auch kein
\family sans
Gehe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
zurück
\begin_layout Description
<Seite>: druckt die Seitennummer: Seite
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
auf
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Seite
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<Seite>: druckt den Text "auf Seite" und die Seitennummer:
\begin_layout Description
<Querverweis>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
auf
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Seite
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<Seite>: druckt die Nummer der Gleitumgebung, den Text "auf Seite", und
\begin_layout Description
Formatierter
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Querverweis: druckt ein selbst definiertes Querverweisformat
einen Querverweis klicken.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Auf Teilabbildungen verweisen
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "uab:Auf-Teilabbildungen-verweisen"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Index
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Querverweise ! auf Teilabbildungen
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Zur Zeit unterstützt LyX das nicht, also müssen Sie LaTeX-Befehle benutzen.
- Die Marke erzeugen Sie mit dem Befehl
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-label{abb:IhrMarkenName}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-der direkt in das Titelfeld der Teilabbildung eingefügt wird.
- Als Querverweis benutzen Sie dann den Befehl
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-ref{abb:IhrMarkenName}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Hier ist ein Querverweis auf Teilabbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset ERT
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-
-\backslash
-ref{abb:Platypus}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Subsection
Automatische Querverweis-Namen
\begin_inset Index
als Querverweisstil
\family sans
Formatierter
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Querverweis
Die Option
\family sans
Spalten
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
überspannen
Die Option
\family sans
Seitwärts
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
drehen
Sie die Option
\family sans
Standard-Platzierung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
verwenden
\begin_layout Description
Hier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
wenn
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
möglich versuche das Gleitobjekt dort zu platzieren wo es eingefügt wurde.
\begin_layout Description
Anfang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Seite
\family default
versuche das Gleitobjekt am Anfang der aktuellen Seite zu platzieren.
Gleitobjekte, die maximal 70
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% einer Seite benötigen, dürfen oben platziert werden.
\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
Ende
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Seite versuche das Gleitobjekt am Ende der aktuellen Seite zu platzieren.
Gleitobjekte, die maximal 30
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% einer Seite benötigen, dürfen unten platziert werden.
\begin_layout Standard
die oftmals zu kleine untere Grenze auf 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
%.
\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
Seite
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mit
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Gleitobjekten versuche das Gleitobjekt auf einer eigenen Seite zu platzieren.
Nur wenn mehr als 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% einer Seite von Gleitobjekten belegt wird, wird eine neue Seite für weitere
versuchen
\family sans
Hier
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
wenn
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
möglich
, dann
\family sans
Anfang
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Seite
Die Option
\family sans
Hier,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
auf
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
jeden
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Fall
\end_inset
[Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
3.2 ist ungefähr hier.]
\series bold
Bemerkung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1: endfloat
\series default
übersetzt den Hinweistext nicht automatisch.
Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
4 in
\series bold
Bemerkung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2:
und die Option
\family sans
Seitwärts
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
drehen
\begin_layout Standard
Alle anderen Dinge sind wie bei normalen Gleitobjekten.
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Um Gleitobjekte nebeneinander zu setzen, wie bei Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Minipages sind in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Die Breite wird für jede Minipage auf 45
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Spalten% und die Box Ausrichtung auf
Der einzige Unterschied ist, dass die Bildeinheit
\family sans
Spaltenbreite
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
%
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Für Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
und Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
In Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
und Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Das wurde in Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
das in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Liste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Inhaltsverzeichnis
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Gerahmte Boxen werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Schat\SpecialChar \-
tier\SpecialChar \-
te
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
Box
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Farbige Boxen werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Die verfügbaren Farben und wie man eigene definiert wurde bereits in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Eingerahmt
\family default
ist 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; sie kann mit
\series default
geändert werden.
Der Standard-Abstand zwischen Rahmen und Text ist 9
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; er kann mit
Schattiert
\family default
beträgt der Abstand zwischen Rand und Text 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; er kann mit
Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Farben\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Schattierte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\family default
geändert werden.
Die verfügbaren Farben und wie man eigene definiert wurde bereits in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
im LaTeX-Vorspann, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Auf Fußnoten kann wie auf andere Gleitobjekte verwiesen werden, wenn in
der Fußnote eine Marke eingefügt wurde.
Dies ist ein Querverweis auf Fußnote
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Um Fußnoten in Tabellen zu benutzen, müssen Sie eine Minipage verwenden,
siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Fußnoten in langen Tabellen wurden bereits in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Weil Sie die Nummer der Fußnote nicht im Voraus wissen können, müssen Sie
sie speichern, nachdem Sie die Fußnote eingefügt haben.
Hinter Fußnote
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Alph
\series default
bzw.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
benutzen zu können, muss in den
\family sans
Mathe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Optionen
\family sans
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Mathe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Paket
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Um also z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
ohne Zwischenraum am Ende der Seite gedruckt.
Damit sie besser zu unterscheiden sind, kann man mit folgendem Befehl im
LaTeX-Vorspann 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm Zwischenraum einfügen:
In einem zweispaltigen Dokument werden die Fußnoten am unteren Rand jeder
Spalte gedruckt, Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Wenn die Fußnoten nur unter der rechten Spalte gedruckt werden sollen wie
in Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
In einigen wissenschaftlichen Veröffentlichungen werden alle Fußnoten am
Ende eines Abschnitts in einem eigenen Absatz wie in Abbildung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Wenn Sie in den Befehlen von Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
@addtoreset
\series default
wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space \space{}
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
footnotemark
\series default
Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Ähnlich wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
beschrieben, können lange Worte nicht umgebrochen werden, wenn sie das
erste Wort der Randnotiz sind.
Um das zu vermeiden, fügen sie 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt horizontalen Abstand vor dem Wort ein, so wie hier:
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hspace{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
angegeben.
Dabei ist der Versatz eine Länge mit einer der Einheiten, die in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Eine negativer Wert versetzt die Randnotiz nach oben, ein positiver Wer
nach unten.
Zum Beispiel ist die Randnotiz neben diesem Text um 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm mit dem TeX-Code-Befehl
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Diese Randnotiz ist 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm von ihrer Originalposition nach oben versetzt.
Das Format von Randnotizen kann allgemein durch Änderung ihrer Definition
geändert werden.
Um z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
Boxen werden benutzt, um einen Textblock zu formatieren.
Sie können benutzt werden, um Dokumente in mehreren Sprachen zu schreiben,
siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, um Text zu umranden, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, um Silbentrennung zu verhindern, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, um Text senkrecht auszurichten, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
oder um die Hintergrundfarbe von Texten zu setzen, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Das Dialogfenster bietet bei
\family sans
Innere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
Minipage
\family default
ist die Standard-Einstellung für neue Boxen und in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Parbox
\family default
in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series bold
Bemerkung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1:
\series bold
Bemerkung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2:
Boxen ohne
\family sans
Innere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\family default
und ohne Rahmen werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
festlegen.
Die verfügbaren Einheiten werden in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Box-Höhe = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Tiefe
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boxhöhe = 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Höhe
\begin_layout Description
Gesamthöhe Dies ist Höhe
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Tiefe:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boxhöhe = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Gesamthöhe
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boxhöhe = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Breite
Wenn Sie eine
\family sans
Innere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\series default
Die senkrechte Boxausrichtung kann in der Ausgabe verloren gehen wenn zwei
Boxen in einer Zeile sind und eine Box z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
Wenn Sie eine
\family sans
Innere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
waagerecht ausgerichtet werden, wenn Sie eine
\family sans
Innere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
Wenn Sie keine
\family sans
Innere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\begin_layout Description
Rechteckige
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box Um die Box wird ein rechteckiger Rahmen gezogen.
\series medium
Rechteckige
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\begin_layout Description
Ovale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dünn Zeichnet einen dünnen Rahmen mit abgerundeten Ecken um die Box.
Die Rahmendicke ist 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Ovale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dünn
\begin_layout Description
Ovale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dick Zeichnet einen dickeren Rahmen mit abgerundeten Ecken um die Box.
Die Rahmendicke ist 0.8
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Ovale
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dick
\begin_layout Description
Schattierte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box Zeichnet einen Rahmen mit Schatten um die Box.
fboxrule
\series default
festgelegt, der Schatten ist 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt breit.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Schattierte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
\begin_layout Description
Doppelt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
gerahmte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box Zeichnet einen doppelten Rahmen um die Box Der innere Rahmen ist 0.75
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
breit, der äußere 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
, der Zwischenraum 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Doppelt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
gerahmte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Box
fboxrule
\series default
ist 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
Mit dem folgenden TeX-Code-Befehl kann er auf 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt gesetzt werden:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Rechteckige Box mit einer Rahmenbreite von 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\end_inset
Der Abstand zwischen dem Rahmen und dem Inhalt ist standardmäßig 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Standard
setzt den Wert auf 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, wie in der folgenden Box:
fboxsep
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
setzt den Durchmesser auf 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
setzt den Durchmesser auf
\family sans
num
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
×
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Minimum(Breite der Box, Höhe der Box)
cornersize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Standard
wird er für die folgende Box auf 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt festgelegt.
shadowsize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
Es folgt ein Beispiel mit zwei nebeneinander gedruckten Minipages.
Ihre Breite ist 45 Spaltenbreite
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
%, und sie sind durch einen
Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Variabler
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
horiz.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Abstand
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Minipages können auch benutzt werden, um Textteilen eine andere Hintergrundfarbe
zu verpassen, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
um 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm nach oben verschoben wurde.
\end_inset
um 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm nach oben verschoben wurde.
\begin_layout Standard
Sie können auch Ihre eigenen Farben definieren, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fboxsep
\series default
gesteuert werden, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
benutzt.
Hier wurden die Rahmendicke und der Abstand auf 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm gesetzt:
\emph default
(oben), sowie sinnvolle Kombinationen aus den vier Grundpositionen.
Z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
\begin_layout Standard
Z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
\begin_layout Standard
Alle Boxen können beliebig miteinander kombiniert werden.
So ergibt z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
\begin_layout Description
Einfacher
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text Ein Text-Dokument; jede Textzeile wird als eigener Absatz in Ihr Dokument
\begin_layout Description
Einfacher
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zeilen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
verbinden Ein Text-Dokument; Zeilen werden so eingefügt, wie sie sind.
\begin_layout Description
Externes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Material Dateien in verschiedenen Formaten.
\lang english
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Die verschiedenen Methoden werden in Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Die Bilddateien können im Dialogfenster
\family sans
Externes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Material
Grafik
\family default
-Dialog eingefügten, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Wenn Sie im Dialogfenster
\family sans
Externes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Material
Das hängt davon ab, ob Sie im Dialogfenster
\family sans
Externes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Material
die Option
\family sans
in
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
anzeigen
Für
\family sans
die Art
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Einbindung
Das obige Beispiel besitzt einen Unterabschnitt mit der Nummer dieses Abschnitt
s.
Auf Marken eingebundener Dokumente kann verwiesen werden: siehe Unterabschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
eingebunden werden, können in LyX angesehen werden, wenn im Dialogfenster
\family sans
Unterdokument Vorschau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
anzeigen
\family sans
Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Aussehen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Grafik Sofortige
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Vorschau
Wenn Sie im Dialogfenster
\family sans
Unterdokument Leerzeichen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
bei
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ausgabe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
kennzeichnen
Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Einfacher
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Text
eingebunden wurde und
\family sans
Leerzeichen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
bei
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ausgabe
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
kennzeichnen
\begin_layout Description
Listing Dieser Typ wird in Kapitel
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-Option
\family sans
Eingebettetes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Listing
p
\family default
, analog zu den in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
beschriebenen Platzierungsoptionen festlegen können.
Die Platzierungsoptionen können gemischt werden und werden dabei direkt
hintereinander angegeben, z.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
B.
\begin_layout Standard
Sie können Listings mit Marken versehen, um auf Sie wie auf andere Gleitobjekte
zu verweisen: Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pass
\emph default
in Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Die Option
\family sans
Erweiterte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zeichentabelle
, den Optionen
\family sans
Erweiterte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Zeichentabelle
und
\family sans
Leerzeichen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
als
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Symbol
\family default
und Bereich 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
8:
und der
\family sans
Art
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
der
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Einbindung
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Die anderen Arten der Einbindung von Unterdokumenten werden in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
können Sie die Listing-Parameters unter
\family sans
Weitere
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Parameter
\begin_layout Standard
Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
ist ein Beispiel für ein Unterdokument-Listing, bei dem die Zeilen 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
15 gedruckt werden.
\begin_layout Standard
Um die in diesem Handbuch verwendeten Maßeinheiten zu verstehen, erläutert
Tabelle
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Zoll (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in = 2.54
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Punkt (72.27
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Pica (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
skalierter Punkt (65536
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
sp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
großer Punkt (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Didot (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd
\end_inset
0,376
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Cicero (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd)
\series default
(1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mu = 1/18
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ps2pdf) benutzt das Programm
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(dvipdfm) benutzt das Programm
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex) benutzt das Programm
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
der
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\begin_layout Chapter
Erklärung der Gleichung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
ist die LaTeX-Länge zwischen dem Zellentext und der Zellgrenze mit dem
Standardwert 6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
arrayrulewidth
\series default
ist die Dicke der Zellgrenze mit dem Standardwert 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Standard
Nach Gleichung
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Setzt man die Gleichungen
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-#LyX 1.6.0svn created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 334
+#LyX 1.6.0beta2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 335
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
Gráficos Aquí puedes elegir tu archivo gráfico y ajustar separadamente su
presentación en LyX y en la salida.
En el apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Para evitar distorsión en la imagen marca la opción
\family sans
Mantener
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
proporción
botón
\family sans
Obtener
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
archivo
El botón
\family sans
Recortar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
delimitador
\begin_layout Description
Opciones
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
extra En esta solapa puedes modificar la apariencia de la imagen en LyX,
y poner la imagen como subfigura de una figura flotante con su propio título.
Las subfiguras se explican en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
La opción
\family sans
Modo
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
borrador
La opción
\family sans
No
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
descomprimir
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
exportar
\family default
sólo afecta a los gráficos EPS comprimidos, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Los gráficos EPS comprimidos sirven para ahorrar espacio de disco si se
utiliza PostScript como formato de salida, ver apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Los formatos de imagen se explica en el sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para información general sobre flotantes, echa una ojeada a la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(# es el número actual).
La imagen se puede insertar sobre el título, como en la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, o bajo el título, como en la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Más información sobre ubicación de títulos en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Las figuras
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Referencia
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cruzada
\end_inset
Las referencias se explican con detalle en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Esto es posible mediante la solapa
\family sans
Opciones
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
extra
.
Ten en cuenta que sólo el título principal del flotante se añade a la
Lista de Figuras.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Las referencias a las subfiguras se explican en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Referencias-a-Subfiguras"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+ La figura
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset Float figure
wide false
sideways false
-status collapsed
+status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Puedes insertar imágenes en cualquier formato.
Pero como se explica en el apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Para aumentar el rendimiento evitando estas conversiones, puedes usar sólo
los formatos de imagen admitidos en el formato de archivo de salida.
Los formatos de salida se explican en el apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Imágenes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mapa
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
bits
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(Bitmap) formadas por mapas de puntos (píxeles), generalmente comprimidos.
\begin_layout Description
Imágenes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
vectoriales se generan mediante una descripción de una serie de trazos (vectores
\family sans
Configuración
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tabla
Una vez puesta la anchura puedes ajustar también el alineamiento vertical.
Una anchura determinada permite tener saltos de línea y distintos párrafos
de texto, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Además, puedes marcar una o más celdas de una fila como una celda multicolumna,
ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
También es posible introducir argumentos LaTeX necesarios para formatos
especiales, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
larga
\emph default
que pueden extenderse por varias páginas.
La sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para una explicación general sobre flotantes, echa un vistazo a la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
\begin_layout Standard
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Para más información ve a la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
caption
\series default
como se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Referencia
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cruzada
\end_inset
Las referencias se explican con detalle en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Si la tabla es demasiado larga para una página, puedes usar la opción
\family sans
Usar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
larga
en la solapa
\family sans
Tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
larga
la tabla, excepto para la primera página si
\family sans
Primer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
encabezado
\family sans
Primer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
encabezado:
excepto para la última página si se define
\family sans
Último
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pie.
\family sans
Último
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pie: L
En este contexto, primera significa primero en este orden:
\family sans
Encabezado, Primer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
encabezado
,
\family sans
Pie, Último
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pie
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Para comprender el uso de este comando, lee al final de la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Las notas se muestran en la parte inferior de la página en la que esté
la celda con la nota.
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
donde el valor puede tener cualquiera de las unidades listadas en el cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: El número de la tabla se incrementa para cada tabla larga, aunque no pongas
leyenda en alguna de ellas.
Por esto podría suceder que, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e., la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.4 siga a la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.1 en la lista de tablas debido a que hay dos tablas largas sin leyenda.
\begin_layout Standard
Esto es una referencia a la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, véase sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Por defecto es 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in (4
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pulgadas).
\begin_layout Standard
donde la anchura puede ser una de las unidades listadas en el apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Leyenda larga completa con anchura de 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm leyenda larga completa con anchura de 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm leyenda larga completa con anchura de 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Leyenda con anchura
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
, como en este documento, se usa la anchura de toda la página para el pie
si utilizas el valor por defecto de 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in para
\series default
.
En este caso, para conseguir exactamente un pie de 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in, puedes poner un valor ligeramente diferente de 4.0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
3.99
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in, o el comando de LaTeX
en vez del recuadro de leyenda de LyX.
La etiqueta para referenciar la tabla se inserta en el primer encabezado.
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
como columnas haya delante de la actual.
En la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para generar la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, crea una tabla 3×3, marca la primera celda y clic-derecha sobre ella.
En el diálogo que surge establece una anchura de 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm y escoge centro en alineación vertical y horizontal.
La alineación vertical se utiliza para todas las celdas de la fila.
Como nuestro texto es menor de 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm, sólo aparece una línea.
en ERT antes de la palabra.
Como el espacio es 0 la salida no cambia.
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Por ejemplo, para crear la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
alineación centro
\emph default
y una anchura de 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
Las columnas combinadas deberían tener exactamente la mitad de la anchura
de la celda multicolumna, así que deberías ajustar 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm para la primera columna.
La segunda columna tendrá entonces automáticamente 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm de anchura.
Para la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
porque una celda es siempre algo mayor que la anchura dada.
El apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm y los valores predeterminados para longitudes, así la ecuación
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
como ERT.
Según los parámetros del comando la multifila se expande a dos filas y
tiene de ancho 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
\begin_layout Standard
En los libros, las tablas se suelen presentar en un formato como el de la
tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Estilo
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
del diálogo
\family sans
Configuración
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tabla
\family default
, como se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Las líneas primera y última tienen un grosor predeterminado de 0.08
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em, las demás tienen un grosor predeterminado de 0.05
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\series default
.
Puedes usar cualquiera de las unidades listadas en el apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
El grosor predeterminado es 0.03
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
l{2pt}
\emph default
significa que la línea se recorta 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt por su izquierda.
Si no se especifica el tamaño las líneas se recortan por defecto en 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\begin_layout Standard
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cmidrules
\series default
como en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
El comando que se ha utilizado para la segunda fila de la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
en un cuadro.
Entonces el cuadro se puede alinear verticalmente como se describe en la
sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Las minipáginas se describen en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
que tiene una anchura de 15
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%:
raisebox
\series default
se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Estilo
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
del
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texto
\family default
.
Esto se ha hecho en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
>{}
\series default
se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Estilo
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
del
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texto
\begin_layout Standard
Para crear la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Estilo
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
del
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texto
\begin_layout Standard
Como se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Se ha puesto 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt para todas las tablas de esta sección.
Por ejemplo, para colorear todas las líneas verticales en verde, crea en
el preámbulo del documento el siguiente formato de columna, de acuerdo
a lo descrito en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Para colorear líneas horizontales, por ejemplo en rojo, como en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
En el marco
\family sans
Espacio
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
adicional
\begin_layout Description
Superior
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fila añade espacio sobre los caracteres de la fila.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Las tablas formales se explican en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
LyX insertará 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em por defecto.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm sobre la fila
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Inferior
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fila añade espacio bajo los caracteres de la fila.
Si la tabla es formal LyX inserta por defecto 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em; si la tabla es normal inserta 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Entre
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
las
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
filas añade espacio entre la fila actual y la siguiente.
Si la tabla es formal LyX inserta 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em por defecto.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm entre las filas
\end_inset
3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm entre las filas
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
A veces mejora la presentación si las entradas en las celdas de una columna
se alinean con un carácter determinado, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
el separador decimal, como en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bottles
\begin_layout Plain Layout
768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixels
\begin_layout Plain Layout
6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
, que permite alinear el contenido de las celdas.
Pero desgraciadamente trata las entradas de celda en modo matemático y
no permite fórmulas en celdas: la primera columna de la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dcolumn
\series default
como la primera columna en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
y sólo con algunos trucos se consigue lo que se espera.
La alineación de la segunda y tercera columnas de la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bottles
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixels
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
El cálculo de la anchura necesaria para columnas extendidas descrito en
la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
evita el problema de partir con guión la primera palabra, como se describe
en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para crear la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Por ejemplo, para poner un grosor de línea de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, como en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
arrayrulewidth
\series default
a 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt en ERT detrás de la tabla o flotante.
\end_inset
Tabla con líneas de grosor 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\end_inset
Para definir un grosor de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt sólo para líneas horizontales, como en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tabla con líneas horizontales de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
Para establecer un grosor de 1.5 pt sólo para líneas verticales, crea el
siguiente formato de columna en el preámbulo del documento, de acuerdo
con lo descrito en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tabla con líneas verticales de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt de grosor
\begin_layout Standard
La tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
que se usa para tablas coloreadas en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Las
\family sans
Notas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pie
y
\family sans
Notas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
margen
cada flotante puede ser referenciado en el texto.
Por lo tanto los flotantes están numerados.
Las referencias se describen en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
La imagen o tabla se inserta encima o debajo de la leyenda en un párrafo
separado dentro del flotante.
Más sobre colocación de leyendas se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Además de los flotantes de imagen y de tabla que se describen en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
y
\series bold
Ajustado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
texto
\emph default
de LyX.
El algoritmo
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
es un ejemplo de algoritmo flotante en el que se ha añadido un espacio
vertical de -4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm al final para tener la línea inferior exactamente bajo la última línea
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\backslash
listof{algorithm}{your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name}
where
\family sans
your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name
, marca la opción
\family sans
Usar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
el
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paquete
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Flotante
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ajuste
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
texto
La anchura y posición del flotante se ajusta con clic-derecha sobre el
cuadro del flotante.
La figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
es un ejemplo de flotante ajustado al texto con una anchura del 40
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Ver unidades disponibles en el apéndice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Nota:
\series default
¡Los flotantes adosados a texto son frágiles! P.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
si una figura está demasiado cerca de la parte inferior de la página se
, debes marcar la opción
\family sans
Usar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
el
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paquete
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
\begin_layout Standard
Puedes ver más detalles y notas importantes sobre comandos de numeración
en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
LyX ofrece como texto las primeras palabras de la leyenda con un prefijo.
El prefijo depende del tipo de flotante, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
para figuras el prefijo será
Referencia
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
El botón
\family sans
Ir
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
etiqueta
\begin_layout Description
<página>: imprime el número de página: Página
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<página>: imprime el texto
\begin_layout Description
<referencia>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<página>: imprime el número flotante, el texto
\begin_layout Description
Referencia
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
con
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
formato: imprime un formato personalizado.
\begin_layout Standard
Ten en cuenta que el estilo <página>
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
no imprime el número si la etiqueta está en la misma página, en la anterior
o en la siguiente.
En su lugar verás p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
el texto
de la ventana de referencia cruzada, que aparece al pinchar sobre el cuadro.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Referencias a subfiguras
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Referencias-a-Subfiguras"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Index
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Referencias ! a subfiguras
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Por el momento LyX no soporta las referencias a subfiguras, de modo que
- hay que emplear comandos LaTeX.
- La etiqueta se crea con el comando
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-label{fig:NombreEtiqueta}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-que se inserta directamente en el campo de leyenda de la subfigura.
- Para referenciar la etiqueta añade el siguiente comando en ERT
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-ref{fig:NombreEtiqueta}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-en la posición del documento en la que quieras que aparezca la referencia.
- Aquí hay una referencia a una subfigura: Subfigura
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset ERT
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-
-\backslash
-ref{fig:Platypus}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Subsection
Designación automática de referencias
\begin_inset Index
en las referencias cruzadas el nombre de los flotantes referidos (o partes
de texto como secciones).
Quieres p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
escribir la palabra
La designación automática de referencias no puede usarse en el estilo
\family sans
Referencia
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
con
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
formato
\family default
, descrita en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
La opción
\family sans
Extender
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
columnas
La opción
\family sans
Girar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
un
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
lado
\family default
sirve para girar flotantes, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la posición de un flotante si desmarcas la opción
\family sans
Usar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ubicación
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
predeterminada
\family sans
\series bold
Aquí
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
si
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
es
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
posible
\family sans
\series bold
Principio
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página
\family sans
\series bold
Fin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página
\family sans
\series bold
Página
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
flotantes
lugar
\family sans
Aquí
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
si
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
es
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
posible
, luego
\family sans
Principio
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página
\family sans
Principio
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página:
\family default
sólo si el flotante ocupa menos del 70
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% de la página puede ubicarse al principio de página (
\family sans
Fin
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página:
\family default
sólo si el flotante ocupa menos del 30
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% de la página puede ubicarse al fin de página.
\family sans
Página
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
flotantes:
\family default
sólo si más del 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% de la página se ocupa por flotantes puede haber varios juntos en la misma
\family sans
Ignorar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
reglas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
Fin
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
página
\family default
al 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
%, añade esta línea en el preámbulo:
Para esto puedes usar la opción
\family sans
Aquí
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
definitivamente
\family sans
[Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
3.2 about here.]
\series default
no traduce automáticamente la indicación, hay que hacerlo manualmente,
ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
4 en
la opción
\family sans
Girar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
un
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
lado
\begin_layout Standard
Los flotantes girados se refieren igual que los normales, y el formato de
la leyenda también es el mismo: un ejemplo es la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para colocar flotantes unos junto a otros, como en la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Las minipáginas se explican en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
La anchura se establece en 45-50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% de la columna y la alineación en
La única diferencia es que el
\family sans
Ancho
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
columna
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
%
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\family default
.
En LyX las leyendas se muestran como etiqueta, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
en el preámbulo del documento.
Por ejemplo las leyendas de la Figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
y la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e., usa el siguiente comando de preámbulo:
report (koma-script)
\family default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
), puedes emplear en vez del paquete
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Ver la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
report (koma-script)
\family default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
), en vez de
\begin_layout Standard
La figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
y la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Esto se ha hecho en la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, descrito en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Nota
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX Este tipo es para notas internas que no han de aparecer en la salida.
\begin_layout Description
Resaltado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
gris Esta nota aparece en la salida como texto resaltado en gris.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Los cuadros enmarcados se describen en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Los cuadros coloreados se describen en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
para insertar notas, se inserta una
\family sans
Nota
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
\begin_layout Standard
Los colores disponibles y el método para definir nuestros propios colores
se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Enmarcadas
\family default
es 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt; se puede cambiar con el comando
El espacio entre el contenido y el marco es 9
\series bold
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Sombreadas
\family default
el espacio entre el contenido y el borde es 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt por defecto; se puede cambiar con
inecolor
\series default
se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en el preámbulo, véase la sección
\series bold
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Sombreada
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
con fondo verde oscuro.
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Nota
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pie
Las notas al pie pueden referenciarse como flotantes: inserta una etiqueta
en la nota y pon una referencia cruzada a esta etiqueta en el texto como
se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Esto es una referencia cruzada a la Nota al pie
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
LyX no suministra prefijos para etiquetas en notas al pie, así que has
de insertar un prefijo, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
manualmente cuando quieras usar el estilo
\family sans
Referencia
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
con
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
formato
\end_inset
Para poner notas al pie en tablas, tienes que usar minipáginas, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Los pies en tablas largas en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tienes que guardarlo.
Para el siguiente ejemplo de marca de pie, se han insertado estos comandos
en ERT detrás de Nota
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pie
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Usar
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
el
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paquete
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Si tienes varias notas al pie de una página, se muestran sin espacio vertical
entre ellas al final de la página.
Para hacerlas más legibles puedes añadir p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm con el comando siguiente en el preámbulo:
En documentos a dos columnas la nota al pie aparece al final de cada columna,
ver la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Si las notas debieran mostrarse sólo al final de la columna derecha, como
en la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
En alguna literatura científica es habitual reunir las notas para imprimirlas
en un párrafo separado al final de la sección, como en la figura
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
La numeración de notas finales puede cambiarse como la de las notas al pie,
como se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
@addtoreset
\series default
como se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footnotemark
\series default
, descrito en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Nota
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
al
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
margen
\family default
\series default
Como en el caso descrito en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
donde offset es una longitud en una de las unidades de la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family roman
\series medium
Por ejemplo la nota adjunta a esta línea de texto está desplazada 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm arriba con el comando ERT
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Esta nota está 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm por encima de su posición original.
\begin_layout Standard
Los cuadros se emplean para dar formato a bloques de texto.
Se pueden usar para escribir documentos con varios lenguajes, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, enmarcar textos, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, evitar la división de palabras, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, alinear texto, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, o para poner color de fondo a un texto, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Cuadro
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Minipágina
\family default
es el predeterminado para nuevos cuadros y se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Parbox
\family default
se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Por razones desconocidas sólo se puede poner el tipo
\family sans
Cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
interior
Los cuadros sin ningún tipo de
\family sans
Cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
interior
\family default
y sin marcos se explican en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family default
.
Las unidades disponibles para la geometría se explican en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Cuadro con altura establecida en 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Profundidad
\begin_layout Description
Alto Es la altura del texto que está dentro del cuadro.
Un valor de, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2 para este tamaño fijará la altura del cuadro a 2 veces la altura del texto:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Cuadro con altura puesta en 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Alto
\begin_layout Description
Alto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
total Esto es el Alto
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Profundidad:
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Cuadro con altura puesta a 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Alto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
total
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Cuadro con altura puesta en 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Ancho
Si has elegido un
\family sans
Cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
interior
\lang english
The vertical box aligment can be lost in the output when you have two boxes
in a line and one has e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a shadow and the other one not.
Si has escogido un
\family sans
Cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
interior
LyX cuando hayas escogido un
\family sans
Cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
interior
Si no has establecido un
\family sans
Cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
interior
\begin_layout Description
Marco
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
rectangular Dibuja un marco rectangular alrededor del cuadro.
\begin_layout Description
Marco
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ovalado,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fino Dibuja un marco ovalado cuya línea tiene un grosor de 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Marco
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ovalado,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
grueso Dibuja un marco ovalado cuya línea tiene un grosor de 0.8
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Marco
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
con
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sombra Dibuja un cuadro rectangular con sombra alrededor del cuadro.
fboxrule
\series default
, la sombra tiene una anchura de 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Marco
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
doble Dibuja un rectángulo de línea doble alrededor del cuadro.
El grosor de la línea interior es 0.75
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
, el de la línea exterior es 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\series default
.
La distancia entre líneas es 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
fboxrule
\series default
es 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
Puede cambiarse con el siguiente comando en ERT, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt:
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\end_inset
El espacio entre el marco y el contenido del cuadro es 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt por defecto para todos los estilos.
\begin_layout Standard
determina un valor de 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, como en el siguiente cuadro:
fboxsep
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
establece un diámetro de 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
fija el diámetro en
\family sans
num
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
×
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mínimo
cornersize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\series default
.
Este comando la ajusta a 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt en el cuadro siguiente:
shadowsize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
A continuación hay dos ejemplos de minipáginas adosadas.
Su anchura está puesta en 45
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col% y separadas por un relleno horizontal, insertado vía el menú
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formato
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
es
\family sans
pecial
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Relleno
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
horizontal
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
La configuración global de párrafos se ignora en las minipáginas.
Esto significa que en las mismas no habrá espacio entre párrafos aunque
pongas p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Salto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
medio
\begin_layout Standard
Las minipáginas también sirven para poner un color de fondo para partes
de texto, ver sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formato
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
especial
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Salto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para alinear una palabra, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
También puedes definir tus propios colores según se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fboxsep
\series default
, respectivamente, como se describe en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Este es un ejemplo en el que se ha puesto un grosor de 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm para la línea del marco:
\begin_layout Description
Documento
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX Otro documento LyX; su contenido se inserta directamente en tu documento.
\begin_layout Description
Texto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
simple
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
como
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
líneas Un documento de texto; cada línea del mismo se inserta en tu documento
\begin_layout Description
Texto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
simple
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
como
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
párrafos Un documento de texto; cada línea del texto se inserta tal como
\begin_layout Description
Material
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
externo Archivos en diversos formatos.
\begin_layout Description
Documento
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
hijo Documentos LyX, LaTeX o texto simple.
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Material
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
externo
\begin_layout Description
Diagrama
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ajedrez Esta plantilla soporta diagramas posicionales de ajedrez hechos
\lang english
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
en ERT.
Los distintos métodos se comparan en la tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Gráficos
\family default
, tal como se explica en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
o como imagen, según la configuración elegida en la solapa
\family sans
Vista
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
\family sans
Documento
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
hijo
El documento incluido de ejemplo tiene una subsección que se numera como
subsección de la presente sección.
Las etiquetas de los documentos incluidos se pueden referenciar: Subsección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
se inserta en el preámbulo del documento maestro, poniendo como argumento
una lista de los nombres de archivo separados con comas, p.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
e.
Los archivos del tipo Entrada se pueden visualizar en LyX si la
\family sans
Vista
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
preliminar
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
inmediata
\family sans
Texto
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
simple
\begin_layout Description
Listado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
programa Este tipo se describe en el capítulo
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Listado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
programa.
La opción de ubicación
\family sans
Listado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
insertado
la sección
\family sans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
p.
\family sans
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\family default
e.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(
\emph on
N.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
del t.
.
Los listados de programa se pueden referenciar como los flotantes: Listado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
En la sección
\family sans
Numeración
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
líneas
La opción
\family sans
Tabla
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
caracteres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
extendida
Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Documento
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
hijo
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Los restantes tipos de documento hijo se describen en la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
A continuación hay un ejemplo, Listado
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, de inserción de líneas de un archivo; en él se incluye el rango de las
líneas 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
15 de este archivo LyX.
Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Diseño
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
del
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
texto.
listings
\series default
, consulta su documentación
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Para comprender las unidades utilizadas en este manual, el cuadro
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
punto (72.27
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
pica (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
punto escalado (65536
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
sp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
punto grande (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
didot (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd
\end_inset
0.376
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
cicero (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
unidad matemática (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mu = 1/18
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
DVI
\family default
o con el botón
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Postscript
\family default
o con el botón
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ps2pdf) Este utiliza el programa
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(dvipdfm) Este utiliza el programa
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex) Este utiliza el programa
Se recomienda usar
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
Ver
\family default
o con el botón
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(que usa
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\begin_layout Chapter
Explicación de la ecuación
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tabcolsep
\series default
es la longitud LaTeX entre el texto y el borde de la celda, 6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt por defecto.
arrayrulewidth
\series default
es el grosor de línea del borde, 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt por defecto.
\begin_layout Standard
Procediendo como en la ecuación
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Igualando las ecuaciones
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sobre características nuevas para la versión
\family sans
LyX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
1.6.0
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Véase la sección
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-#LyX 1.6.0svn created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 334
+#LyX 1.6.0beta2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 335
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
Graphique Cet onglet vous permet de choisir le fichier contenant votre image
et d'ajuster l'apparence qu'elle aura sur la sortie imprimée.
Les unités de longueurs utilisées sont décrites dans l'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Conserver
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
proportions
\family sans
Formats
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fichiers
dans le fichier en appuyant sur le bouton
\family sans
Valeurs
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Fichier
Avec l'option
\family sans
Couper
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
à
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
délimitation,
\family sans
Options
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
et
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
en faire une sous-figure avec sa propre légende si elle incorporée dans
un flottant de figure.
Les sous-figures sont décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
L'option
\family sans
ne
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
décompresser
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
à
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
l'exportation
Les graphiques EPS zippés sont utiles pour économiser de la place sur les
disques quand on utilise PostScript comme format de sortie, voir l'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les format d'images sont décrits dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Pour des explications d'ordre général concernant les flottants, jetez un
coup d'œil à la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series bold
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
(# est le numéro réel de l'image).
Vous pouvez insérer l'image au dessus de la légende comme pour la figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
ou en dessous de la légende comme pour la Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Vous trouverez plus d'information sur le positionnement des légendes dans
la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Les figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Référence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
croisée
\end_inset
Le référencement est expliqué plus en détail dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sur l'image et allez sur l'onglet
\family sans
Options
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
et
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
, cochez l'option
\family sans
Sous
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
figure
et tapez la légende dans le champ qui vient d'être activé.
Notez que seule la légende principale des flottants est reprise dans la
Liste des Figures.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Le référencement des sous-figures est expliqué dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Référencer-Sousfigures"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+ La figure
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Vous pouvez insérer des images dans n'importe quel format connu.
Mais, comme nous l'avons expliqué dans l'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\lang french
l'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
images
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Matricielles
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ou
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
bitmap) l'image est décomposée en une mosaïque des points (ou pixels), souvent
\begin_layout Description
Les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
images
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Vectorielles
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ou
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
redimensionnables) l'image est décrite sous forme d'objets, ou vecteurs
vertical de la ligne courante.
Une largeur fixée va permettre aux cellules d'avoir des sauts de lignes
et donc, plusieurs paragraphes de texte, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Vous pouvez aussi marquer une ou plusieurs cellules d'une ligne comme étant
un multicolonne, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
L'option
\family sans
Tourner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
case
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
90°
L'option
\family sans
Tourner
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
le
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
90°
\lang french
On peut aussi entrer des paramètres LaTeX pour obtenir des mise en formes
spéciales pour le tableau, voir les sections
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Défaut
\family default
va convertir le tableau en tableau formel comme on le décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Vous pouvez aussi utiliser cet onglet pour ajouter un espacement vertical
dans les lignes du tableau comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
long Cet onglet est utilisé pour transformer un tableau en ce que l'on nomme
qui peut continuer sur plusieurs pages.
Les sections
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Visualiser\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Barres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
d'outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\begin_layout Standard
Pour des explications générales sur les flottants, jetez un œil à la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
\begin_layout Standard
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Pour plus d'information voyez la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
caption
\series default
, qui est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Référence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
croisée
\end_inset
Les références croisées sont expliquées en détail dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
l'option
\family sans
Utiliser
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tableaux
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
longs
de l'onglet
\family sans
Tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
long
de la fenêtre
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tableau
première page, si
\family sans
Premier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en-tête
\begin_layout Description
Premier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
En-tête: La ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessus et qui n'ont
dernière page si
\family sans
Dernier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pied
\begin_layout Description
Dernier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
pied: La ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessous et qui n'ont
Dans ce contexte, première veut dire première en suivant l'ordre
\family sans
Pied, Dernier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Pied,
et
\family sans
En-tête, Premier
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
En-tête
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Voyez la note grisée de la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Elles apparaissent en bas de la page dans laquelle se trouve la cellule
contenant la note.
Par exemple le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
valeur
\series default
peut avoir n'importe laquelle des unités listées dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LTleft
\series default
à 0
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
Le numéro de tableau est incrémenté à chaque tableau long, même si vous
n'avez pas prévu de légende.
À cause de ça, vous pouvez avoir le cas où par exemple le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.4 suit le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
2.1 dans la liste des tableaux, si entre les deux il y a deux tableaux longs
\begin_layout Standard
Ceci est une référence au tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Sa valeur par défaut est 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in.
\begin_layout Standard
où la largeur peur être exprimée avec les unités qui sont listées dans l'appendi
ce
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
long titre complet avec la largeur réglée à 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm long titre complet avec la largeur réglée à 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm long titre complet avec la largeur réglée à 5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Légende avec largeur à
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
, comme c'est les cas dans ce document, la légende prend toute la largeur
de la page quand on utilise la largeur par défaut de 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in pour
\series default
.
Pour avoir dans ce cas une légende qui fasse exactement 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in de large, vous pouvez soit prendre une valeur très légèrement différente,
comme par exemple 3.99
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in, soit utiliser la commande LaTeX
L'étiquette utilisée pour faire référence à ce tableau est insérée dans
la légende du premier en-tête.
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
qu'il y a de colonnes avant la colonne traitée.
Dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Pour obtenir le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
droit dessus.
Dans la fenêtre de dialogue qui s'ouvre fixez une largeur de cellule de
2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm et choisissez les alignements vertical et horizontal centrés.
L'alignement vertical va s'appliquer à toutes les cellules de la ligne.
Comme notre texte est plus petit que 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm, une seule ligne va apparaître.
en code TeX avant votre mot.
Comme l'espace est égal à zéro, la sortie ne sera pas modifiée.
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Par exemple, pour créer le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
,
\emph on
alignement
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
horizontal
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
centré
\emph default
et une largeur de 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
Les colonnes couvertes doivent avoir exactement la moitié de la largeur
de la cellule multicolonne, vous devez donc donner une largeur de 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm pour la première colonne.
La deuxième colonne aura alors automatiquement une largeur de 1.25
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm (la largeur de la multicolonne moins la largeur de la première colonne).
C'est ce qui a été fait pour le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
parce qu'une cellule est toujours un peu plus large que la taille qu'on
lui donne.
L'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
cm et les valeurs par défaut pour les autres longueurs, l'équation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
comme du code TeX.
Les paramètres de la commande indiquent que la cellule multi-ligne couvre
deux lignes et a une largeur de 2.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
\begin_layout Standard
Dans les livres les tableaux sont souvent mis en forme d'une façon semblable
à celle du tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tableau
de la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tableau
\family default
comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
La première et la dernière ligne ont par défaut une épaisseur de 0.08
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em alors que les autres lignes ont par défaut une épaisseur de 0.05
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\series default
.
Vous pouvez utiliser toutes les unités de longueur définies dans l'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
La valeur par défaut pour l'épaisseur des lignes est de 0.03
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
l{2pt}
\emph default
pour ce paramètre, la ligne va être rognée de 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt à son extrémité gauche.
largeurRognage
\emph default
les lignes sont par défaut rognées de 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\end_inset
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
cmidrule
\series default
s qui se recouvrent comme pour le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
La commande qui a été utilisée pour la deuxième ligne du tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Medipix
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
Pour pouvoir être aligné verticalement par rapport au texte, un tableau
doit être à l'intérieur d'une boîte.
La boîte peut alors être alignée comme c'est décrit dans la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les minipages son décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
dont la largeur est de 15
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col% :
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les boîtes élévatrices (raiseboxes) sont décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Éditer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Style
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texte
\family default
.
C'est ce qui a été utilisé pour créer le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
>{}
\series default
dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Éditer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Style
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texte
\begin_layout Standard
Pour créer le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Éditer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Style
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texte
\begin_layout Standard
Comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Elle est mise à 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt pour tous les tableaux de cette section.
Pour colorer les filets verticaux, par exemple en vert, créez le format
de colonne suivant dans le préambule du document, en suivant la description
de la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Pour le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Pour colorer les filets horizontaux en rouge comme pour le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tableau
\begin_layout Description
Haut
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ligne va ajouter de l'espace au-dessus de caractères de la ligne .
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les tableaux formels sont décrits dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
LyX va insérer par défaut un espace de 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
espace de 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm en haut de la ligne
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Bas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ligne va ajouter de l'espace sous les caractères de la ligne.
Si le tableau est un tableau formel LyX va insérer par défaut un espace
de 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em, pour les tableaux normaux, l'espace par défaut est de 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Entre
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
lignes ajoute l'espace entre la ligne courante et la ligne suivante.
Si le tableau est un tableau formel LyX va insérer par défaut un espace
de 0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em.
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
espace de 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm entre les lignes
\end_inset
espace de 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm entre les lignes
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hspace*{}
+\begin_inset space \hspace*{}
\length 0pt
\end_inset
On peut parfois améliorer l'aspect d'un tableau en alignant le contenu des
cellules sur un caractère donné, par exemple le séparateur décimal comme
dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bouteilles
\begin_layout Plain Layout
768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixels
\begin_layout Plain Layout
6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
dcolumn
\series default
la première colonne du tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
ressemblera à la première colonne du tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\lang french
On ne peut pas aligner la deuxième et la troisième colonne du tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bouteilles
\begin_layout Plain Layout
12x24
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Pixels
\begin_layout Plain Layout
1024x768
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\begin_layout Plain Layout
32x6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Calculer la largeur nécessaire pour des colonnes couvertes par un cellule
multicolonne comme dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
hspace{0pt}
\series default
évite le problème de césure du premier mot, comme c'est décrit en section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Ce format utilise l'équation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Pour créer le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
.
Pour mettre, par exemple, une épaisseur de filet de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, comme pour le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
arrayrulewidth
\series default
à 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt en utilisant du code LaTeX après le tableau ou le flottant de tableau.
\end_inset
Tableau avec des filets de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\end_inset
Pour que seuls les filets horizontaux aient une épaisseur de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, comme dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tableau avec des filets horizontaux de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\end_inset
Pour que seuls les filets verticaux aient une épaisseur de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, créez le format de colonne suivant dans le préambule, en suivant la
description de la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Pour le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Tableau avec des filets verticaux de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
qui est utilisé pour avoir des tableaux colorés dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Les
\family sans
Notes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page
et le
\family sans
Notes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Marge
le texte.
Les flottants sont donc numérotés.
Les références croisées sont décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
#:
séparé, à l'intérieur du flottant.
Vous trouverez plus de détails sur le positionnement des légendes dans
la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
En plus des flottants de figures et de tableau qui sont décrits respectivement
dans les sections
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
et
\series bold
Flottant
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
d'enrobage
Il peut être utilisé pour des morceaux de code source ou des descriptions
d'algorithmes.
Vous pouvez par exemple utiliser l'environnement Code
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX qui est décrit dans le
Guide
\emph default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\emph on
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
l'Utilisateur
\emph default
de LyX.
l'algorithme
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
est un exemple de flottant d'algorithme où un espace vertical de -4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm a été ajouté à la fin du flottant pour que la ligne du bas du flottant
\backslash
floatname{algorithm}{votre
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
nom}
\family sans
\lang french
votre
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
nom
\family sans
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
List
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
/
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\backslash
listof{algorithm}{your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name}
where
\family sans
your
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
name
, activez l'option
\family sans
Utiliser
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
le
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paquetage
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
math
dans la rubrique
\family sans
Options
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
des
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Maths
de la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Document
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Flottant
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
d'enrobage
Voyez dans la manuel
\emph on
Configuration
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
La largeur et la position du flottant peut être modifiée en faisant un
clic droit sur la boîte du flottant.
La figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
est un exemple de flottant d'enrobage avec une largeur de 40
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col%.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les unités disponibles sont expliquées dans l'appendice
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, vous devez activer l'option
\family sans
Utiliser
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
le
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paquetage
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
maths
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
dans la rubrique
\family sans
Options
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
des
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Maths
\begin_layout Standard
Veuillez aussi jeter un coup d'œil à la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Référence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Croisée
Le bouton
\family sans
Aller
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
à
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
l'étiquette
\begin_layout Description
<référence>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: affiche le numéro de l'élément, c'est le choix par défaut :
\begin_layout Description
(<référence>)
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: affiche le numéro de l'élément entre parenthèses, c'est le style utilisé
\begin_layout Description
<page>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: affiche le numéro de la page sur laquelle se trouve l'élément: Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<page>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: affiche le mot
\begin_layout Description
<référence>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<page>
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: affiche le numéro de l'élément, le mot
\begin_layout Description
Référence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mise
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
forme
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: affiche une référence croisée qui définit son propre format.
boîte de la référence croisée.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Faire référence à des sous-figures
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Référencer-Sousfigures"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Index
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Références ! à des sous-figures
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Actuellement les références croisées vers des sous-figures ne sont pas gérées
- par LyX, vous devez donc utiliser des commandes LaTeX.
- L'étiquette est crée avec la commande
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-label{fig:YourLabelName}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-qui est mise directement dans le champ de la légende de la sous-figure.
- Pour faire référence à cette étiquette, ajoutez la commande suivante en
- code TeX
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\series bold
-
-\backslash
-ref{fig:YourLabelName}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-à la position où la référence doit se trouver dans votre document.
- Voici une référence vers une sous-figure : la sous-figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset ERT
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-
-\backslash
-ref{fig:Platypus}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Subsection
Nommage automatique des références croisées
\begin_inset Index
choisi le style de référence
\family sans
Référence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
mise
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
forme
\family default
décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètre
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Flottant
L'option
\family sans
Plusieurs
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
colonnes
L'option
\family sans
Rotation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
90°
\family default
est utilisée pour faire tourner les flottants, voyez la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
En désactivant l'option
\family sans
Utilise
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
le
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
placement
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
par
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
défaut
\begin_layout Description
Ici,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
si
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
possible: essaie de placer le flottant à la position où il a été inséré
\begin_layout Description
Haut
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page: essaie de placer le flottant en haut de la page courante
\begin_layout Description
Bas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page: essaie de placer le flottant en bas de la page courante
\begin_layout Description
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
flottants: essaie de placer le flottant sur une page à part, éventuellement
d'abord essayer
\family sans
Ici
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
si
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
possible
, ensuite
\family sans
Haut
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family sans
Haut
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family sans
Bas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
page
\family sans
Page
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
flottants
supplémentaire
\family sans
Ignorer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
règles
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LaTeX
Vous pouvez aussi redéfinir les règles avec les commandes LaTeX qui sont
données entre parenthèses après les descriptions des règles données ci-dessus.
Par exemple, pour augmenter à 50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
% la valeur de la règle de bas de page dont la valeur par défaut est souvent
dans ce cas utilisez l'option
\family sans
Ici
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
à
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
tout
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Prix
\family sans
[Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
3.2
\series default
ne fournit pas de traduction automatique de l'indication textuelle, vous
devez donc le faire manuellement, voyez la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
4 de
un clic droit sur la boîte du flottant et utilisez l'option
\family sans
Rotation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
90°
Faire référence à un flottant renversé se fait de la même manière que pour
un flottant normal, la mise en forme de la légende est aussi identique
: Le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Pour placer des flottants côte-à-côte, comme pour la figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les minipages sont décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
La largeur est mise à 45
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-50
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
column% et l'alignement de la boîte à
La seule différence est que l'unité de longueur
\family sans
Largeur
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
colonne
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
%
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
dans le préambule du document.
Par exemple les formats de légende de la Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
et du Tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
report (koma-script)
\family default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
), Vous pouvez utiliser la commande incorporée
\begin_layout Description
Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: La légende est placée en dessous de la figure
\begin_layout Description
Tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
: La légende est placée au dessus du tableau
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
report (koma-script)
\family default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
), vous pouvez utiliser à la place du paquetage
\begin_layout Standard
La figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
et le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
C'est ce qui a été utilisé pour la figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, qui est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Listes
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
&
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
TdM
\begin_layout Description
Note
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX Ce type de note est à usage interne et n'apparaîtra pas sur la sortie
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les boîtes encadrées sont traitées dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les boîtes colorées sont traitées dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de la barre d'outils, vous insérez une
\family sans
Note
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
\begin_layout Standard
Les couleurs disponibles et la méthode pour définir vos propres couleurs
sont expliqués dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
peut être modifié avec la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Style
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
texte
Encadrées
\family default
est par défaut de 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt ; elle peut être modifiée en changeant la valeur de
\series default
.
L'espace entre le contenu de la note et le cadre est par défaut de 9
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt ; cette valeur peut aussi être modifiée en changeant la valeur de
Grisées
\family default
, l'espace par défaut entre le texte de la note et le cadre est de 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt ; ce qui peut être modifié en changeant la valeur de
definecolor
\series default
est expliqué dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
definecolor,
\series default
voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Note
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page
sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton
\family sans
Note
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Bas
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Page
On peut faire référence à une note en bas de page comme on le fait avec
les flottants : Insérez une étiquette dans la note et faites une référence
croisée vers cette étiquette comme c'est décrit dans la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
Voici une référence à une note de bas de page :
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Pour utiliser des notes de bas de page dans les tableaux, vous devez utiliser
des minipages, voyez la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Les notes de bas de page dans des tableaux longs sont traitées dans la
section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
part.
Pour la marque de note qui suit, ces commandes ont été insérées en code
TeX après la note
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
, activez dans la rubrique
\family sans
Options
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
des
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Maths
dans les paramètres du document, l'option
\family sans
Utiliser
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
le
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paquetage
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
maths
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
AMS
vertical entre elles en bas de la page.
Pour les rendre plus lisibles vous pouvez par exemple ajouter un espace
de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm avec la commande suivante dans le préambule :
Dans un document à deux colonnes les notes de bas de page apparaissent en
bas de chaque colonne, comme sur la Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
Si les notes ne doivent apparaître qu'en bas de la colonne de droite, comme
sur la Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Dans certaines publications scientifiques, il est courant de rassembler
les notes de bas de page et de les imprimer dans un paragraphe particulier
à la fin de la section, comme sur la Figure
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
La numérotation des notes de fin peut être modifiée comme celle des notes
de bas de page comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
@addtoreset
\series default
comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
footnotemark
\series default
, décrite dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Note
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Marge
\end_inset
Comme dans le cas décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
où l'offset utilise l'une des unités listées dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
déplace vers le bas.
Par exemple la note qui se trouve à côté de cette ligne de texte est décalée
vers le haut de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm avec la commande en code TeX
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Cette note en marge est décalée vers le haut de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm par rapport à sa position d'origine.
Les boîtes sont utilisées pour mettre en forme un bloc de texte.
Elles peuvent être utilisées pour écrire un document en plusieurs langues,
voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, pour encadrer des portions de texte, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, pour empêcher que des mots subissent une césure, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, pour aligner du texte, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
, ou pour modifier la couleur de fond d'une portion de texte, voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Une boîte grise avec une étiquette
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(Minipage)
La fenêtre de dialogue qui apparaît donne accès aux types de
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
\family default
est le type par défaut pour les boîtes nouvellement créées et il est décrit
dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Parbox
\family default
est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Pour une raison inconnue, vous ne pouvez mettre le type de la
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
Les boîtes sans
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
\family default
et sans cadre sont expliquées dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Dans la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Boîte
.
Les unités de longueur qui sont utilisables dans ces champs sont décrites
dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boîte dont la hauteur est égale à 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Profondeur
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boîte dont la hauteur est 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Hauteur
\begin_layout Description
Hauteur
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Totale C'est égal à Hauteur
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Profondeur :
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boîte dont la hauteur est 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Hauteur
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Totale
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\align center
Boîte dont la hauteur est 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
Largeur
Quand vous avez choisi une
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
\lang english
The vertical box aligment can be lost in the output when you have two boxes
in a line and one has e.
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
g.
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
a shadow and the other one not.
paragraphe grâce à la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Boîte
Quand vous avez choisi une
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
paragraphe
quand vous avez choisi une
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
Si vous n'avez pas choisi une
\family sans
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Intérieure
dans la boîte de dialogue
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Boîte
\begin_layout Description
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
rectangulaire Ceci dessine un cadre rectangulaire autour de la boîte.
\begin_layout Description
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ovale,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fine Ceci dessine un cadre ovalisée autour de la boîte.
L'épaisseur du trait de ce cadre est de 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ovale,
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
épaisse Ceci dessine un cadre ovalisée autour de la boîte.
L'épaisseur du trait de ce cadre est de 0.8
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
ombrée Ceci dessine un cadre rectangulaire avec une ombre autour de la boîte.
fboxrule
\series default
, l'ombre a une épaisseur de 4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Description
Boîte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
double Ceci dessine un cadre rectangulaire à deux traits autour de la boîte.
L'épaisseur du trait du cadre interne est de 0.75
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
, l'épaisseur du trait du cadre externe est de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\series default
.
La distance entre les deux cadres est de 1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
0.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
fboxrule
\series default
est 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
Elle peut être modifiée avec la commande suivante en code TeX, par exemple
pour avoir 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt :
fboxrule
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
L'espace entre le cadre et le contenu de la boîte est le même pour tous
les types de cadres, par défaut il est de 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Standard
met une valeur de 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt, comme celle utilisée pour cette boîte :
fboxsep
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
donne un diamètre de 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm.
fixe le diamètre à
\family sans
num
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
×
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
minimum(largeur et hauteur de la boîte)
cornersize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
1.5
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cm
\series default
.
Elle est fixée à 2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt pour la boîte suivante par la commande :
shadowsize
\series default
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
=
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
2
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt
\begin_layout Standard
Ci-dessous, vous avez deux exemples de minipages côte-à-côte.
Leur largeur est fixée à 45
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
col% et elles sont séparées par un ressort horizontal, qui a été inséré
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Ressort
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Horizontal
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Space \hfill{}
+\begin_inset space \hfill{}
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Les minipages peuvent être utilisées pour changer la couleur de fond d'une
portion de texte, voyez la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Passage
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
à
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
la
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ligne
Vous pouvez aussi définir vos propres couleurs comme c'est décrit dans la
section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
fboxsep
\series default
, comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Voici un exemple où l'épaisseur de la ligne du cadre a été mise à 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm:
\begin_layout Description
Document
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX Un autre document LyX ; son contenu est directement inséré dans votre
\begin_layout Description
Texte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Brut Un document textuel ; chacune des ses lignes est insérée comme un paragraph
\begin_layout Description
Texte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Brut
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
par
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ligne Un document textuel ; ses lignes sont insérées telle qu'elles.
\begin_layout Description
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe Fichiers de formats variés.
On insère des objets externes en utilisant la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Fichiers\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe
\lang english
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
entrée comme code TeX.
Ces différentes méthodes sont comparée dans le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Les images peuvent être traitées dans la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe
Graphique
\family default
, comme c'est décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe\SpecialChar \menuseparator
de la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe
soit comme une image, selon que vous avez ou non activé l'option
\family sans
Afficher
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
dans
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
de l'onglet
\family sans
Vue
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
LyX
de la fenêtre de dialogue
\family sans
Objet
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Externe
\begin_layout Description
Inclus
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(include) Vous pouvez inclure des documents LyX et LaTeX.
numérotée comme sous-section de la section actuelle.
Les étiquettes présentes dans le fichier inclus peuvent être référencées
: la sous-section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Description
Incorporé
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(input) Cette méthode est très semblable à la méthode Inclus, les différences
\family sans
Aperçu
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
sur
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
le
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
vif
Vous pouvez utiliser l'option
\family sans
Marquer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
espaces
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Texte
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
brut
l'option
\family sans
Marquer
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
les
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
espaces :
\begin_layout Description
Listings Ce type d'inclusion est décrit dans le chapitre
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Code
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Source
L'option d'emplacement
\family sans
Listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
en
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ligne
\end_inset
correspondant aux emplacement décrits dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
On peut référencer les listings de la même façon que les flottants :Voir
le listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Dans la rubrique
\family sans
Numérotation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
des
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Lignes
Vous devez utiliser l'option
\family sans
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Caractères
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Étendue
\end_inset
Table
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
caractères
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
étendue
\end_inset
Espace
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
représenté
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
par
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
un
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
symbole
\end_inset
, l'intervalle de ligne étant 3
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
8:
Listing
\family default
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
de
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Code
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
source
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Les autres types de sous-documents sont décrits dans la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\family sans
Insérer\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Référence
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Croisée
\begin_layout Standard
Le listing
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
est une exemple de listing issu d'un fichier ; ici les lignes 10
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
15 de ce fichier LyX sont listées.
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Format
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Texte
dans le champ
\family sans
Paramètres
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
du
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Listing
\begin_layout Standard
Pour comprendre les unités de longueur utilisées dans cette documentation,
le tableau
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
point (72.27
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
pica (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
scaled point (65536
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
sp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
gros point (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
bp = 1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
in)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
didot (72
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd
\end_inset
37.6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mm)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
cicero (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
cc = 12
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
dd)
\begin_layout Plain Layout
unité mathématique (1
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
mu = 1/18
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
em)
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(ps2pdf) Ceci utilise le programme
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(dvipdfm) Ceci utilise le programme
\begin_layout Description
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex) Ceci utilise le programme
Nous recommandons d'utiliser l'option
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
qui utilise
\family sans
PDF
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
(pdflatex)
\begin_layout Chapter
Explication de l' Équation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\series default
est la largeur utilisée par LaTeX entre le texte de la cellule et la bordure,
sa valeur par défaut est 6
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
arrayrulewidth
\series default
est l'épaisseur de la bordure de la cellule, qui est par défaut de 0.4
-\begin_inset Space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
pt.
\begin_layout Standard
D'après l'équation
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
En posant que les équations
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
voir la section
-\begin_inset Space ~
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset